Why Choose NON- RELIGIOUS Health Share Plan | Health Insurance Alternative

Folks on today’s podcast, it’s a follow up to the last health insurance alternative. A lot of you guys are quitting your day jobs eventually, and the question comes up, what the heck do I do for life insurance or not life insurance, for medical insurance to pay my bills in case I get sick or, something bad happens to me.

So we’re gonna be going to this today with another alternative. Just to get that in your ear and you of be thinking about it. This is the kind of stuff we talk about at our events, which is gonna be coming up very soon. Time is running out to sign up for the retreat. Go to simplepassivecashflow.com/ 2023 retreat and sign up there.

Actually apply there if you are not in our family office group and you’re a newcomer, but really there’s no other way to build relationships. Investors meet myself. Ask all the questions you’d like, or even the hard questions. I think that’s why we create this intimate environment where you guys can ask those difficult questions.

But something I’ve been working on I decided not to go for and buy a house to live in because, My problem is I don’t have a W two day job and clean financials. So what mortgage lenders will do for people like me is they need to get me past this income verification.

They wanna know that I can pay, that I have income, but because I have no W two salary I have, they have to look at my, either my 10 90 nines, which I report. or they look at my bank statements and they go through all my stuff. And as you guys know, mortgage lenders are in the box thinkers.

They don’t really understand. It’s pretty common that, in investors, they bang their head against the wall because the mortgage lenders like you lost all this money on this K one. It’s yeah, you’re supposed to lose a lot of money. It’s all depreciation and paper losses, which is supposed to offset and lower my taxes.

But it hurts you in this situation. But there are lending options as I discovered for folks like myself and a lot of you guys out there who show a lot of negative losses from the K one s on your tax forms to save thousands of thousand dollars in taxes, which is in what my opinion, how you’re gonna do it.

The trade off is when you’re trying to get a home loan and especially a home loan, over that ju loan size, to buy a 1, 2, 3, 4, $5 million house and above. In this tough situation. But just to, so you guys don’t have to go through the brain damage, like once you get past the income verification, which I did, right?

I got past that dungeon stage. Basically, it’s credit score determines your amount of how much loan you can get. They’re quoting me. I need, they need to see 50% loan, the value or loan to income. So they figure out what my income was. I didn’t review it, but whatever it was decent enough.

And then that’s how they figure out what’s your maximum monthly payment is. If you guys wanna hear more about this in detail, we had a podcast about this in the last year, non qualifying co mortgages, and he locks with Benson Pang. If you guys wanna go check out the website on this, but you know the quotes that I got back were.

Nine and a half to 10 and a half percent. And I’m all for taking the arbitrage between, the your cost of borrowing your money and then go invest it and make more other places. But, That really tests my fortitude, right? It’s not like you’re paying four or 5% in an infinite banking policy and you’re gonna go make 15, 20% plus because now the interest rate is higher and also the yields have dropped in deals because the cash flow is a lot lower and due to uncertain times worth where interest rates are at right now.

So that will change probably next year. At this kind of point in time, I was like, yeah, probably not the best. And I gotta admit, I was a little sticker shocked by the monthly mortgage rates there. But, it just and it pissed me off and it’s you know what, I’m just gonna go pay cash for this thing, and I don’t want the mortgage lender to get 1%, 2% on this thing.

I even looked. So this is 30 year fixed mortgages. And I also found that, in this non qm, non-qualified mortgage world where they actually treat you like adults and let you make choices even though they may not be good for you, that they also allowed for some interest only for the whole note.

Which was, you, I, from what the comparison I made, like you’re paying maybe half a percent higher. So if you’re paying. Point 9.5%, it bumped it up to 10%, so not much. Definitely made the payment come down maybe by 10% per month. But, in, in theory, if you’re a, use debt to your advantage purists, right?

You want to get that interest only, but obviously that, that clashes with, I think, most conventional thinkers out there. Still at the end of the day, I kind felt like, just buying a house just was a, I think this is where it comes down to more personal how you are, how you view life and like I’m more to spend money on experiences and things.

I’d rather go and spend a few thousand dollars a month, or heck even $5,000 a month on meals with others. Time savings, spend time with my family or just have less stress of doing, saving money. Like drive, driving to Costco to stand in that awful line.

To save $10 or for me, $30 in gas cuz my gas, my tank is pretty big. But It’s or spend that five, $10,000 plus on a mortgage at a very high interest rate. I think it made that. Made it very obvious and I don’t know what I was thinking. I’m sure a lot of you guys cut waiver on like bad purchases like that, it just, I think for me going through that exercise I was interested and I also wanted to share a lot what I was seeing in the non QM world in terms of mortgages and but also it was a good exercise for me to you.

Reiterate what is it that’s really important to me? What is my ideal life? And, if you’re somebody who wants to buy a big house, because that’s important, that’s totally cool. I no qualms about it. And I think it’s great that you own it. But if you’re somebody who’s on the fence and, you can’t have everything, but you have to figure out what is the most important thing here.

That’s, I think, the message and that’s my takeaway, if you guys want more insights on this, catch up with me in Hawaii when you guys come here in January for the retreat. There’s still time to sign up for that and if you guys are new to the group, join the club.

Simple pass at cash.com/club and we’ll also gonna be doing an Ask Lane show, so make sure you’re on the email list. You can sign up on that list and you can submit your question at simplepassivecashflow.com/question will air it on the show and enjoy the podcast.

Hey, simple passive castle listeners. Today, we are going to be talking medical sharing. What do you do after you leave that w two job and you leave that health insurance behind some other cheaper alternatives and something that I’m personally looking at lately, but don’t you introduce our guest Thomas Lindsay on everyone, Thomas.

Hey, how you doing lane? Thanks for having. Yeah. So Thomas helps people transition from get out this healthcare dilemma that we all will find ourselves after we finally fire the boss and leave that pushy W2 job behind. So let’s start from the top, right? You get health insurance, and maybe we can talk about how it’s a little bit you.

It’s expensive. Why is it so expensive in a normal study? It’s expensive because the insurance companies and the hospital systems like it expensive they make their profits are a percentage of the cost. So one of the things that happened with the ACA is that they said that you have to spend 80% of the premium on.

Medical care, right? And then the rest could be used for administrative expenses, including profit. How do you grow your profit? If it’s based on a percentage of premium, you grow your premium, right? And therefore you grow your profit, you can’t shrink premium and make more profit. You make less profit.

The whole thing and it’s, and it was that way before the ACA I think the ACA just really accentuated the storyline, which is the more premium people pay, the more the insurance companies make. And it’s just a, it’s really a dirty little system where consumers are, left to think that this is somebody else’s money.

I buy insurance and then the insurance company. Pays for my medical expenses. And I have no idea how much it costs. I have no idea how much they’re being billed, how much they’re paying. I think they’re working for me in my, on my behalf to keep costs down, but they’re not right. And a lot of my investors that are doctors or dentists, they see this from the other end.

They’ve gotta do all this coding. Actually. I have a few investors that are actually the coding people. Who support the the medical staff doing all this stuff and, that’s not cheap, right? No, there’s it’s over, it’s 33 to 35% administrative burden essentially. And it’s ridiculous. Cuz when you have that third party in the middle it just creates. Excess costs.

So for a normal person leaving the W2 job, and I’m assuming that traditionally those people you would go and you’d get like a bronze, gold, silver, or just a right open market plan. Is that correct?

Yeah. You have a, yeah. You have a couple of options, right? Once you. No longer once you’re no longer part of a group health plan. You can either go to the exchange or go to the private marketplace or get an association plan. So if you’re a CPA and you’re part of that association, then they’ll have an association plan that, that you might be able to access and use, but those are your three choices.

They’re all terrible, right? Because the premiums are high, the benefits are low. It’s a poor value. And, but that’s all, but that’s, what’s available to the individuals. And what is that? What is the somebody who is maybe 50 years old, pretty good health single person. How much would they expect to pay?

Once they leave their corporate job per month on health insurance on. If it’s just them or them and their spouse, yeah, they’re gonna pay, they’re gonna pay six, $700 in employee, an individual premium and a family of five that kind goes up two or three. If you’re a family and you, yeah.

If you’re 50 years old and you have family coverage, you’re gonna be, in the 1700 to 2000 plus range for any kind of. Benefit, right? Yeah. Yeah. Which isn’t a, that much actually. Traditionally people think you don’t wanna leave your day job just cuz you are gonna have medical insurance, but I always tell people, Hey, do the math, right?

If your medical insurance is gonna be a thousand, $2,000, that may just mean like a few rental properties. There you go, you don’t need to stay at your crappy job for the extra 15 years or stay the extra four years to get that supposedly grandfathered health insurance plan. Yeah. It’s real short term thinking, right?

You, a lot of the stuff is like we’re brainwashed. I thinking like the health and coverage is this magical benefit, but yeah, it all costs money at end of the day. And it costs. I guess what we’re saying here, if you go to the normal, bad options, you’re gonna spend to a thousand of $2,000, we can do better than that.

That’s why you listen to podcasts and listen to stuff, but we’re gonna talk about medical cost sharing today, which I guess maybe you’ll start at the price, right? Like how much does this typically cost in comparison to the normal. It’s gonna be about 60% less than what you’re currently paying and you’ll get, you’ll have lower out of pocket expenses typically as well.

So not only is it cheaper from a monthly cost standpoint, but when you actually go to use the benefit, when you actually go to get medical care, you’re gonna pay less. Out of pocket with most of these health share plans and specifically with Soldera. Yeah. So take us how, what is this thing and, how does it work?

How is it that it’s saving the costs are so much lower? Yeah. It’s saving because it puts you as a consumer in charge of your care. And also. It, you are shopping for the healthcare, right? So you’re a cash pay customer and the health sharing organization will reimburse you for the expenses that you incur that are beyond your chosen level of self insurance in essence, like the deductible, right?

If I’m gonna pay the first 500 of each need then everything after that would be shared among the community. But the way it works is you present, let’s say you, if you’re going for, voluntary procedure or appointment you can either there’s no network, so you can go wherever you want.

You can choose your own doctors or hospitals or whatever. You can either call and talk to the care logistics team and they’ll hook you up with a provider or you can do that yourself and go where you want, but you present yourself as a cash pay customer and they will bill you, you might have to pay something up front when you’re there.

But you wanna pay, you don’t wanna pay any more than your chosen, what they call initial UNS shareable amount. So you don’t wanna pay any more than that. And then have them bill you, and then when you get those bills, you send them into Sedera and then they share them among the community and send you the money to then pay the provider.

So it’s different in that regard, right? Normally with insurance you. You show up, there’s gonna be a copay and a deductible, and even you might even know that there’s co-insurance, but you really don’t know. You wait for the provider to tell you what that is, and they have to look at your card or maybe even call the carrier and then charge you accordingly.

And then they build the insurance company and then the insurance company pays them. And if there’s something that you owe you’ll get. You’ll get a bill for that. And it’s like a paperwork nightmare. You get bills, you get explanations of benefits and you really don’t know what anything costs and you don’t care because it’s, somebody else paying for it.

Or you think the insurance company’s really looking out for you and keeping the costs down, but you’d be, you’ll be shocked when you go from that model to this model. where you actually are engaged in the process and you are aware of what’s being billed. It’s a game changer. So one, one con obviously that you just mentioned is, know, you gotta come out with a little bit of money out of pocket which is probably no problem.

Average listener here. They’ve got a few 10 grand sitting in the bank. 50 a hundred grand in their life insurance policy. They, so they can come out of pocket a little bit. So then you take the, when the real bills come through the majority of the costs, they take that to their the medical share group, which H how many people are typically in one grouping?

It’s the entire community. So with Sedera there’s a little over 17,000. Members that are pulling their resources together. And there’s all kinds of medical sharing groups out there. Some of ’em are small, some of ’em are pretty large. So you can build some of a steady state.

Cause I think I’ve seen some really small ones where it’s maybe like a few hundred people or I don’t know how their, exactly how small is, but the medical sharing facilitators. They bring in the bills and they call up client, 57 and 84 and 236 and say send Tom a check for it this much, and this much.

Yeah. That’s a real convoluted way of doing it. So two things I would say to that is one anything below a thousand would. I would not want to be a part of Ty if you’re a large employer, then when you get to a thousand employees, maybe 1500 employees, that’s when it’s makes sense to start self-insuring to where you’re, you are up to a certain point, right?

You. But before that you don’t wanna be, there’s not enough people yeah. To spread the risk, not enough steady state, keep the costs down. Yeah. Yeah. So I would say that. And then to your, what was your other point? You, you said something else and I just I guess another question I have is oh, people are like, alright, this isn’t like a huge institution.

Even 17,000 is a smaller number. I think people are worried, especially people that are they have some money and they, maybe they take care of themselves cuz they know, fitness is the real wealth after a while. How do I make sure I don’t get into a group of, four foot, five, 300 pound people who eat Twinki for lunch every day.

That’s a great question. And the, yeah, there’s really no way of doing that. At a certain size, it’s gonna be the average of, America, which is not right. The average is not good, but the way costs are controlled is makes all the difference in the world. So one there’s preexisting condition exclusion.

So any condition or any, anything that you have that’s been treated in the past three years or been diagnosed in the past three years? Or that you’re even you’re aware of, and maybe you didn’t even get treatment, you have that issue that’s not shared. Not fully shared among the community until year four of your membership in year one, they don’t share anything in year two, they’ll share, up to $15,000 towards that condition.

And then year three 30,000 and then year four. It’s fully shareable. So that’s one way they do it with, preexisting condition limitations, and then through the cost control mechanisms that they have in place. And just getting actual fair pricing from providers instead of paying, the inflated costs that the insurance companies pay.

And then other services like second MD, if getting a second opinion, they also don’t. Don’t pay for things like if you’re drunk and you get in a car accident, that’s not shareable. If you just like breaking the law, like there’s some religious affiliated, which the one that you’re working with they’re not religious affiliated, but I know some of the religious affiliate, they won’t pay for things like abortion or correct some certain other procedures.

So you gotta be careful about those too, right? And so that’s how, some of the ways they control the cost and make sure that it’s, it’s really for, situations where, you’re in an accident or you’re you get ill and it’s not self inflicted. It’s not, something you didn’t need to have, something voluntary.

So those are ways to control the cost. And it’s amazing what you can achieve when you do that. You can significantly reduce costs by more than half utilizing those tools. Yeah. And I think it’s just another example of, look, if you’re just gonna do what everybody else does, you’re gonna get slaughtered with everybody else.

If you invest in the 401k, you’re gonna work at your day job for 50 years. If you invest, if you use the same healthcare. Coverage is everybody else you’re gonna pay two or three times the price. But like anything else it’s, it’s not without a little bit of work. And but what I keep telling people, especially in the past investors, seller and mastermind that I have, it’s not that hard to be an astute investors.

You don’t need to underwrite deals. You don’t, you don’t need to like go travel. There’s just certain things that you need to do. And this is just a small example of that, there’s some tricky things here. But yeah, I guess Thomas, like where do we start? Like somebody’s quitting their job in the next year or two, maybe take us some practical steps of, know, engaging with a company like yours, but what are some ways of comparing different options?

Yeah, step, step one would be to, evaluate your own current health situation, right? To determine whether do you have a preexisting condition? Are you getting regular treatment for that? How much does that cost? If you can. You can do a little bit of homework. Just because you have a preexisting condition doesn’t mean that you won’t be better off in a health share arrangement.

You just need to look at the, how much that actually costs you. Then look at the health share and say, okay, how much are they gonna share towards this in year one, year, two, year three. And how much will I be saving when I, ditch my insurance and go with this route? Because I can use that savings to help.

Cover some of those costs, right? So you gotta do that analysis. And then there, there are several, there’s probably only really five health share organizations that I would consider. And so you’d go and do a comparison to see, who’s got the best best for you membership benefits for you, right?

Got it. So those would be, those are really the two steps that, that she need to take to get the ball rolling. Yeah. And what would you say like less than half or about 50% savings, the the typical on these things and, yeah, I would say 40% plus easy. I saved 62% when I switched.

After I left my corporate job and then I lost, I couldn’t afford the Cobra premium, cuz my income was cut in half and I went without actually for a while trying to find something that, that I could afford. And that’s when I found the medical cost sharing and I was paying. $1,750 and it went down to $487 in essence.

So I think that’s actually more than 62%. But yeah, you guys can I’ll put all this information along with other information about the subject simple, passive, casual.com/healthcare. And this is something I’m looking into these days. I’ve got health insurance through my wife, but I want to quit that silly W2 job.

And that’s really the only thing holding me back. And I know a lot of people back from putting the day job is just this, what are we gonna do for healthcare, right? Yeah. Somebody I heard use the term spouse with benefits. , that people are looking for, spouses with benefits or that’s the reason, the only reason that the spouse is working is so that they have the health insurance.

it’s a, it can be a game changer. It was for me and I’ve been in insurance, my entire career. I’m a, I’m an insurance professional. I’ve I as a, in my corporate job for 23 years, we did payroll, HR, employee benefits and work comp insurance for employers all across the country.

And we would provide health insurance plans on a group basis. would put together self-insured plans. And so I’ve been in this space, my whole career. I just never realized as an individual out, a free range chicken out in the wilderness, how difficult it was and how expensive it was to find healthcare until it happened to me.

And I was super grateful to have found this this alternative. And so I’m a huge advocate for. And, again, I, when I first came across it as an insurance guy, I was let my red flags go up and I’m like this is not. Yeah. I For me it was, it sounds too good to be true, but then when I start to, travel and I meet in other investors and join different masterminds, these are the things that we talk about, like which, which Medi share are we using or healthcare sharing plan.

Somebody mentioned to me like, there’s one with. bunch of CrossFitters like those kinds of people with eight packs and can I don’t know if they make ’em run like a run test or what, but. Someone mentioned there’s some health sharing plans with that I wanna get in those, those guys don’t there you go.

Get sick. yeah. There’s one affiliate for Sera out of California who has a CrossFit. And so he promotes it among his CrossFit membership and I think he’s rolling it out to other CrossFit, specifically to CrossFit companies yeah. To offer to their me. So for the insurance company it behooves them to get those type of fire breathers in their community.

Cause totally. Yeah. They want the people who are health conscious, who, doesn’t mean you have to be, you don’t have to be a health nut and, or, or being Superman shape. But just, Caring a little bit about, yourself and eating in things in moderation and getting exercise and moving around, it goes a long way to reducing how much burden of a burden you are on the healthcare system.

Yeah. I’ll be on the lookout for that one, but anything anything else we think we missed that, that kind of folks knew newer to this, they need to know about. Yeah, just, there’s a, you wanna look at what the preexisting, first of all, I would say, this is definitely something everybody needs to take a look at.

There’s no reason that you need to continue to do the same thing over and over again, like you were saying earlier and expect a different result, right? The 401k healthcare, get all that stuff. Yeah. Costs. Aren’t gonna go down. And it’s not gonna get less expense. And this is a way where you can take control and have a little bit of individual responsibility in the system and really fight back against, the huge corporations that control healthcare in this country.

So wear it with a badge of honor and go out and help make a change, and cuz that’s the only way things will change is once the insurance companies fill that. But definitely check it out. Fight the power. And what’s your contact for people to get ahold of you ask more questions.

You can reach us@gotpurehealth.com. You can find me on LinkedIn, Thomas rock Lindsay. And then, yeah, I’ll put this all up on simplepassivecashflow.com/healthcare along with a lot of other things I’ll find on the subject. We’ll figure this out together, folks and this would be another good option, joining that simple passive cash flow accelerator program, you get in and you build relationships with other sophisticated and accredit investors and you talk about this stuff, it’s just not something you’re gonna just walk down the street and say, yeah, I do this for my healthcare.

It’s a little personal. So we make people sign confidentiality agreements. So we can talk about this stuff freely. Thanks for joining us guys. And we’ll see you guys later. Thanks lane.

December 2022 Monthly Market Update

 What’s up folks? This is the December, 2022 monthly market update, and you’ve got a long one for you guys, which is probably why we’ll probably move to break these up as weekly installments into the future. But if you haven’t yet, check up my book, the Journey to Simple Passive Cash Flow. I think we’re a little bit over a hundred reviews at this point.

If you Pick it up or if you guys listen to the book on Audible. You guys can leave us a review or you can check out the free book@simplepasscash.com slash book, which is your little trick. If you guys listen to these episodes and we put these monthly reports up on the website at simple pass cash flow.com/investor letter.

So if you’re listening to this on the podcast and something sound interesting, you wanna look at the graphic later you can go ahead and access all the recordings with the cool visuals and highlights and graphs and charts on there. But before we get going Just see you guys here in about a month for the annual retreat.

If you guys want to jump on board and hang out with us for three days you guys can go to simple passive cash flow.com/ 2023 retreat. I think it’s like we’re calling the Huey five cuz it’s, making it like UFC where we start to number them. So we’re on their kind of our fifth one of these big events, but it’s great opportunity for folks to get to know other real.

Credit investors since most people out there just don’t have a clue about, using passive activity losses to lower the order income to drive their AGI down under 300 or 200, or not pay any taxes, or they still think tendered ones are a good idea and get around other people who aren’t, don’t think you’re crazy for taking money outta your HeLOCK to go make a higher rate of return outside of there.

First teaching part today anchor retail. Investments with fitness centers. Now the term anchor tenant is is very familiar in retail, shopping, malls, centers, stuff like that, where you have a grocery store as your anchor tenant. Now, I personally don’t, not super fond of shopping malls and that type of stuff, but like now they’re saying that the fitness center is the retail.

Anchor tenant for that. So that’s just a little bit of information for you guys to just always be learning, right? I think I personally like a lot of apartments maybe even self storage a little bit not huge of animal mobile home parks. And I like office if you can buy it at that right price, even in this pulse pandemic market.

But I’m not a huge fan of shopping. I think e-commerce. I do the little shopping centers, but I think it’s always good that people keep learning about these types of things. Also in the news, our business online reports, especially this great news for you, hunts investors with us.

As you guys know, we’re just wrapped up and we are starting to lease up our first development 230 unit development out there and we are start going to start to lay the foundation for our second development, which is 300 unit apartment complex in Western part of Huntsville. But the good news keeps happening.

First solar. Announce plants to develop 1.1 billion solar module manufacturing facility in Decatur, which we have three apartments out in Decatur, which is, I call it 20, 30 minutes west of Huntsville. So that’s always good to be investing with a storyline like this. Not only is storyline, but also, the numbers and growth population keeps going up and up.

So let’s talk about FTX and Alameda. And although I don’t invest in this type of stuff, and this is exactly the reason why I’ve been following this story as like how some people watch The Bachelor. Because it’s entertaining to me cuz I don’t really have money in it.

I’m sorry. If you had money with block fi and you were lured by the high staking yields and always scratched your head, how are they making those high yields? And to your dismay, this all happened, but for those of you guys who don’t, aren’t familiar, it’s this this dude’s fault.

Sam Bankman freed SPF is what we’ll refer to him. He’s the shyster involved in this. He created an exchange where people would load up their cryptos or buy cryptos and it’s supposed to act like a bank, right? Or like a, like your Vanguard account or your brokerage. But little did people know that, SPF and his little band of eight to 10 misfits in Bahamas, and the story kind of goes deep.

A lot of it is. A lot of the extra stuff, like the whole polyamorous group of bandits he had and his girl ex-girlfriend who had no experience trading or really no real job prior to this. Running a multi-billion dollar company. A lot of this stuff is makes the story interesting.

I see it as a drama unfold, I’m just gonna report on the facts here, but Fdx. Was one company and their other company was this Alameda Research, which SPF kept arms length transaction, arms length to him. He put his ex-girlfriend in charge there. But obviously everybody knows what’s going on, that he pretty much has direct control over both of these entities.

So Alameda Research is the the high risk trading company, which is really how they got started back in 2000 and s. But what they did was they used the deposits from people putting money into ftx to bankroll the Alameda research bets. And so the way the story unfolded, you know, ftx, I believe was the second or third largest exchange at the time.

I think the first was Binance. So these guys are always competitors and they always went head to head and there was a . Twitter, I don’t know what you call the tabacco or they basically, there were some tweets went back and forth where, finance revealed some holes in fgx and people started to look and basically it made the whole house of cards fall.

And boy did it fall. And this is maybe about a month ago, this all happened and basically it. Everybody found what a kind of a Ponzi scheme it all was. Now the lesson learned or at least for myself, is when you have two entities, like we have an apartment here, we’ve got well over 50, some 50, I’d say 50 live deals.

Right now, we’re not allowed to commingle the funds from one deal to. Even though 49 of ’em are doing really well and one is struggling, you can’t bring over funds to save another. That’s commingling now, unless you state it in your ppm. It’s illegal. What these guys did was obviously legal, but the thing about crypto is like, there’s not a lot of regulation in auditing in this.

These guys never even had any board. There was no really adult supervision in this FTX company. Ftx, you might have heard of ’em. They were signing up all these celebrities as spokespeople, like Tom Brady, his ex-wife super model. They were all not in on it, but they all were all paid off to promote the company.

And I just, came back from a going to Miami and I went to a basketball game and the, it’s still named FTX Arena. I don’t know when they’re gonna take that off, but, I guess the lesson learned there is just because there’s a big charade and marketing push around something for example, crypto.com is owned by, it has her name all over the X Staples center in Los Angeles where the Lakers play.

Not saying that’s a scam or anything like that, like a lot of this is like manufactured celebrity manufactured it may or may not be real and I for one know What I do, what we’ve done at Simple passive cash flow.com where we created this investor group it’s follows the same thing.

We like to, I, I like to put it all on display and be very transparent with investors, which is why we do the events so you guys can come and meet real investors than to just go off of how many Facebook likes or Instagram followers somebody has. That’s, that stuff can be engineer. I’ll be the first one to tell you guys that to me the really, the only way to really know if something’s legit is to know the business and know the people, and maybe most importantly, know the people.

Know the people who’ve invested with the people in the past.

But anyway, I’m sorry if you lost money through this. And, the, it seems to be this kind of fraud is pretty ramped in, in the crypto world. blocky.com, which is another big, I don’t know if the word is exchange or brokerage is the right word, but whatever it is, they were also back to backing FTX in some indirect manner, and they also went bankrupt and a lot of people lost lofts money in there.

They’re still investigating all this stuff. It’s fun. If you didn’t lose money to watch all the SPF videos out there, he’s running his mouth and his driving his lawyers crazy. But this is man, like this just reiterates like, why do we invest in real estate? Because it’s a hard asset at the end of the.

Is worth something. In fact, it’s a com. It’s a working commodity where people live in it, and that need isn’t gonna be really going away anytime soon. Out of everything I can think of, other than throwing away the garbage, I think that real estate, especially workforce housing, real estate is here to stay, whereas crypto is not a concern and nor does it provide any utility.

So I’ve always thought about this esoterically and how do I create a will or trust and make sure my kids aren’t idiots investing in Luna or some kind of fake thing. And other than I put the rules like invest in real stuff where you’re highly collateralized and the thing actually makes, has utility in the world because it’s like the tulip thing again, right?

The tulip thing. I guess there was technical collaterals, a physical object, but what the heck did tulips do? What utility did it do? Take it for what you wants. Just ideas I have. Real estate hits both of those. Plus the taxes, right? Getting the passive losses and being able to legally pay less and less, or even no taxes at all.

I just don’t think you can be real estate. I think the one bad thing about real estate is you can’t trade in and out of it on a whim, which might be a good thing for most people. And the other bad thing is you’re not gonna make huge amounts of money. You’re not gonna make 30, 40, 50% plus a year on it.

And if that’s you, maybe. It’s probably a sign that you don’t have very much money and you have to, you’re lower net worth and you have to take these moonshot. But if you’re an accredited investor, you don’t need to get these high returns. You just need your money to be stable and safe and not lose your money and not have it just drop overnight.
10, 20%. Like the stock market or 80%, a hundred percent like crypto. That’s not any utility in the world.

All that said, I the idea crypto. I like it’s, I like the how it’s circumvent countries, they can’t really control it. There’s a whole conspiracy theory over, maybe the politicians or the people who are really in charge or trying to create this debacle on purpose to create the reason for the regulation.

That’s probably gonna be coming down the pipeline. And, so that the kids are finally regulated with this stuff and are taxed, right? That’s the IRS love the taxes stuff as it, as of revenue source. I, for one, has follow Who follows s e c law Think it’s great. Yeah these guys need, people in crypto need to follow scc.

It’s a security, in my opinion doesn’t really matter. I like to see them follow the same rules that I have to do. But anyway, that’s off my soapbox. If you lost some money with this stuff, I’m sorry. Next time, invest in real estate in cash flowing stuff that is providing real utility in the world.

In fact, create value, right? That’s real. Wealth comes to people who create value. If you’re not creating value, you’re just. And we create value by just slowly and very boring fashion changing out units and increasing the value of the property, which our tenants to pay more on rent for, which makes the price of the property go up.

It’s very boring, although it’s very prudent. Okay, so back to the Real news. JP Morgan is about to spend 1 billion on hundreds of rental homes across the. becoming a mega landlord. So I always say Follow what the smart money is doing. They’re picking up rental problems.

So what they are doing, because they have so much money, a lot of times what they’re doing is they’re building big developments build to rent kind of model. And so that they can scale with this. And this is, I think, where the small landlord has the advantage over these big guys because small landlord can pick up rental property here, and here.

And, they’re willing, small landlords willing to put in a little bit of sweat equity and trade time for money where it’s not really efficient for a large player like JP Morgan to own 2000 units across a five mile ring. It’s all over the place. It’s not scalable, which is exactly why, we in this middle market between, few million dollar transaction to 50, a hundred million dollar transaction like apartments because, some of the big players, they don’t really play in the space too much.

Yet we can get better pricing than the, and better synergies and better efficiencies. Than the average mom and Paul investor, even the mom and Paul investor buying a 20 unit or 40 unit apartment complex. Equity multiple says going beyond narrative market drivers wage growth is still healthy.

5% in the US where the fed’s target is 2% inflation. We haven’t really seen the inflation come down by huge amount. There are talks in the tech sector of some layoffs there, but still, Job growth and unemployment is still pretty dang good, which is a great sign for the economy. I actually would like to see that go down so we can just flush it all out and get back to the lending markets being normal instead of being assaulted with these high interest rates.

But in all due time office loans are hard to come by and this is one. You’re buying office. I think if you can buy it at the right price, it’s a good deal. But the thing that impacts that is your lending. And this is why we’ve pause our normal value add apartment acquisitions.

I would say probably at least for six months until we start to see the interest rates come back to earth a little. No different than you buying your home to live in, right? Like the price might stay the same or even come down, but if interest rates go up, your affordability gets worse and worse.

As we kind of brace for even more interest rates hikes on November 2nd, the interest rate got roll 75 basis points and I suspect maybe one or two next year to be coming. We’re just not seeing a real big dent on the unemployment. It’s like you just take a big stick and like trying to chop a tree down and just take a big whack at it.

Fed just took 75 basis points, which is a big jump, but the tree’s still standing. So you, what do you do? You just keep chopping at it until it breaks or the unemployment starts to go up. So you’re trying to induce the unemployment to. So inflation comes down. Big picture, foreign investors continue to seek stability in the United States.

If you think inflation is high in the United States, look elsewhere it’s climbing and I think the United States, even though we, I don’t know if we or myself or we always have a self doom look at our country. A lot of times, United States is probably one of the more stable places, at least legally, and as far as you’re the best amongst the world.

Fundamentals that they did point out is impacting a US apartment market, including home high prices and rising mortgage rates. So this makes people renting in apartments. Even more of a demand as people can’t afford houses to live in. They have to rent somewhere. And a lot of that is in multi-family apartments.

Another shift. Foreign investors are becoming more accepting of secondary and tertiary markets versus a prior narrow focus on US gateway cities and urban cores. It’s always funny, I’ve talking with some foreign investors and a lot of times they don’t know anything other than Los Angeles, San Francisco, and New York.

And you tell ’em, oh hey, there’s this place called Seattle. And they’re like, no, we’re not interested in that. We never heard of that place. That’s just how it is. We think it’s stupid, but I don’t know what many people can name more than six, five or six China cities. I dare you.

I dare if more than five, but I don’t, I certainly don’t. But that has a bigger population in America, so probably should. . But what the, the light reported that Sunbelt cities, including Austin, Dallas, Fort Worth, along with Charlotte, Denver, Nashville attracted more interest, partially due to lower tax.

Incentive is other areas of interest include Atlanta, Phoenix, and Seattle. More stability, consistent returns and current strength as opposed to property sectors in Europe and. There the US dollar offers a degree of stability international currency fluctuations.

It’s commercial property Executive. That’s a article here on the pros and cons of zero cash flow deals. There are times when such deals can be advantageous when they come with a warning label while zero cash flow de. Assets do have a place, especially when it comes to single tenant lease properties.

They’re certainly not for everyone. So here’s my take on this. We always preach cash flow and cash flow is there just in case of hard times. But what do you do? Say you are in tough times and the. The cash flow isn’t there because hey, interest rates went up and which they have.

Are you willing to take a hit on your cash flow to go into a deal, purchase a deal? To some extent, if, I think the second thing to look at is if you’re picking up a property in this environment where the price is lower because. The seller needs to sell it. And they know that it’s a softer market out there, meaning there’s not that many buyers who can qualify or get financing to make the deal work.

So they have to drop the price. And that’s exactly what’s happening. Now we’re in this kind of price discovery land where, buyers still think their price is worth what it was, maybe a year ago. They understand that the new buyers just aren’t able to qualify for as much affordability and they’re holding costs and their debt service is gonna be a lot more, and therefore the demand is less and the prices should come down.

Right now the sides are very separate. And this is this again called price discovery land. Now, I don’t know when the, when it’s gonna stabilize more, but you. We always in these reports talk about things in generalities, good investors should be picking out the outliers, right?

When somebody is really desperate to sell, pick it up at a good price, even though your interest rate is high and potentially maybe even more even. if there is zero or negative cash flow, maybe you guys are gasping out there, right? No, I’m not saying that you should buy something with zero cash flow, but it may make sense if your property capitalize.

Maybe you have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 years of cash reserves to paid to debt service if you know that you have the collateral there. So a point would be like if you buy, if a property’s normally a hundred dollars and now the price is 75. And you’re gonna suck away a dollar every year on the debt service because you’re negative cashflow.

I might take that deal because I’m like I mean it’s 25 years for me to get to a point where I’m just not going to I’m gonna be underwater now. That’s a very rudimentary example, but it just proves my point that is one way I would say it. And so it’s not, this is what I think.

You just stay semi-hard or it takes a business mind to say in everything that there is risk, you’re going into an asset. In that example for severe discount, how long can you hold onto your breath till things get back to normal and things get back up to where it should be.

And then you know the people who took a bit of a risk or gamble. And that’s not saying that it’s a good or bad thing. Can capitalize on that. Buying something for 75 cents on the dollar like that October. CPI suggests inflation may be slowing as housing demands continue to weekend. This is something I’m looking at closely, and this is from Fannie Mae. Say shelter costs continue to grow at a robust rate, however arising at 0.8% over the month and 6.9% over the year. New cyclical highs.

So owner’s equivalent rents slow to a 0.6 month of or month gain. You’re starting to see the signs of inflation cooling off. I don’t think it hasn’t hit. If you Google CPI or like the big numbers that your layperson will be looking at. But I think these are good signs that you’re seeing things start to reverse on the inflation.

And then the Fed can just give us a break on those interest rates and get back to business. So still we know that shelter’s a legging indicator and that home prices are beginning to. Decline and private measures of rent increases have slowly have slowed and they outright decline in the coming months.

Although we don’t believe this one report will significantly affect the Fed’s current aggressive tightening stance we do view this as a sign. Inflationary pressures are generally slowed this is from Chandon economics. Differences in rent or home personal inflation rates, reach a record. Personal inflation rates can look much different depending on if somebody rents or owns their home. Adjusted CPI inflation rate for renters was 7.8% in October, 2022. Meanwhile, the adjusted CPI rate for fixed rate homeowners total just 5.6 or the same period.

So I guess, overall what they’re trying to say here is the renter inflation. The difference between the spread, between inflation, between the renters and the homeowners is really big right now. A lot bigger than normal. I don’t know what that really means. Maybe it, maybe it’s just saying that the rich get richer and the poor get poorer again.

But or maybe if I’m reading into it, saying, The people who are homeowners and locked in at those nice 3%, 4% interest rates. They’re sitting pretty right now, where the renters are still out there in the cold and rain and their rents are being increased on them. I. Wealth management.com says multifamily investment coming back to earth.

They’re starting to see the rents not level off, but it’s not growing at that astronomical rate as it once did in the past year. Which is echos that last article where we’re saying, inflation is seeming to slow down a little bit.

Arbor reports, this is they’re talking about small multifamily investment trends. Consumer price index services increased 8.2% from a year goal from September, 2022. That’s them again, measuring. I know, I’ve heard of this being as high as 9%. I had to bet that things would get around 10%, but hopefully, we’re just gonna level off here and go back down.

The multifamily sector and small assets sub-sector continue to benefit from a unique set of circumstances. While multifamily assets are not refresh recession proof, they are downturn resilient. Even as rent growth decelerates year over year gains still outpaced inflation. The sector’s unique ability to absorb inflationary pressures in a powerful determiner.

Continues to attract new buyer demand liquidity is another factor that has enabled small multifamily subec to maintain its ity. And this folks is the reason why I invest in this type of stuff. It does well in recessions. I don’t know if the word is, recession resistant, recession proof.

I guess nothing is recession proof unless you’re investing in life sediments, which just determines if people are dying or not, but, a lot. I can’t think of any other businesses more recession resistant than multi-family apartments. If there is, let me know. I’d sure to invest in it, but that’s the thing.

You can’t invest in that type of stuff. It’s going to be somebody’s, business that the average person, the passive investor out there who’s looking to diversify in the multiple things is not able to. Obtain, like how it is with multifamily apartments and syndications and private placements.

A also reports that the loans are way down, which is, no secret to everybody and which is why if you’re a mortgage broker right now, things are pretty tough because just, it’s just hard to get deals done when people, saw like some of these interest rates. Half of what, it was not too long.

And I believe that this is in, just like how the lumber prices shut up a year or two ago. I think we’re looking at the same thing, and maybe even on the same timeline, where it goes back down in a year or two.

Refinancing share of multifamily lending. Loans originated for the purpose of refinancing, accounted for 75% of the small multifamily. So not new originations, but refinancing. You know what I’m prob what I’m thinking a lot of that is, is maybe people taking equity off the table and liquidating it to just put the cash reserves or to show up other projects.

And this is very different than what the regular person will be doing out there, right? People like to pay down their debt. They don’t like to liquidate their equity, but I think everybody needs to take note of this because this is what the pros do. If you had a few million dollars of equity in your apartment, it makes sense to take that off the table and just stick it in the bank.

Because in, in times get tougher, it’s harder to get at that equity. It’s not liquid. Which, just this is befuddles me, right? Why is it that everybody’s taught to pay off their houses and throw money in there where it’s inaccessible in tough times.

So CAPA rate spreads. So I’ve shown this. Many times, and it’s always good to come back to it, why do we invest in real estate? Real estate’s great in all, but like we make a good amount of returns when you apply leverage. And the thing is the price that the percent or interest rates that you borrow, the money is, not saying always, but typically lower than what the cap rates or what the returns on the properties.

What you don’t want is, a time like in 2020 when this delta, the spread is low. What you want is a nice, big, healthy spread there. If you recall, 2010 to 2000, I would say 16 was coin the golden age of apartments in multi-family, where the spread was huge. Then things got a little tricky, right?

As things started to really tighten up. Now, one could say that, this spread is a little bit wider now, a lot wider where it’s been in the last couple of years. But this is a time where it takes very the reason why is because the prices in, that you could buy these properties have come down.

But your hoarding costs has gotten way. But that’s where we are in terms of the spread. It’s, I don’t think it’s not possible for you to be like, oh, like the spread is small now I’ll just wait. Or it’s large. Now I’ll, it’s time to buy multifamily. It doesn’t work like that. Because going into deals, it takes a long time to transact, maybe two to four months from first contact to actually close an asset, and then, who knows what’s happening then.

Which is why the whole. Just keep buying good deals is probably the best approach or kind of dollar cost average to this is always, typically the spread between interest rates and CAPA rates go that spread is there and you apply leverage and you, that’s how you make money.

But, so looking at the graph. This lower one is the all multifamily and this is the small multifamily. Your small multifamilies are typically gonna have a larger cap rate because it’s more headache, it’s more pain in the butt and not, and that’s why the cap rates are higher because you know you’re probably gonna have it is just it for a lay invested.

They’re like, oh, let me go after a small multi-family because the cap rates are higher, but, More experienced investors know that it comes with more headaches and shovels and friction costs too, that aren’t really accounted for in it. But been there, done that. I, we started with a lot of Class C.

Smaller units, like 50 units, 70 units, and we graduated to the larger Class B stuff. Now we’re trying to get to a development and being more of a pro equity lending lender source and just give predictable returns to investors in the debt fund and then for larger returns to do the developments.

But, that’s the, our stories, it started with those Class C buildings, which is typically the smaller multi-family stuff. Not saying we chased the returns because a graph like this told us it was higher returns or higher caps, which not entirely all part of the story.

It’s that was all that we could do back then. But I’m, I’ll give first an experience that it’s maybe not worth it. It isn’t worth it in my opinion.

I would say, There’s a nice, sweet spot, with good tenants or no tenants. That’s why we do the developments,

expense ratios. So this is your expenses and expenses has been going up and up. I would probably say that well next quarter will probably see this bar graph jump. Now, expenses are coming from. Higher insurance costs, rising utilities, which is completely inflation inflationary. Other costs like taxes to property taxes, especially when prices have increased the last several years.

And then now the other thing is that is testing all apartment owners today and all real estate and owners today is the the interest rates going up, especially if you had a bridge law. Hopefully you’ve got a rate cap in there, that also increases your debt service, which makes your holding costs go up, which is why you’re starting to see the expense ratios climb across the bar.

But, it’s all, it all works within the system because if the expense ratios get so high where people aren’t making money, , that’s when kind of the prices go down, and that’s when you know the Fed should manipulate interest rates down. It all it, the nice thing about real estate is you can stay in business as long as you have capital stores to last these things, and these things don’t last forever.

As you can see, the loan to values have come way down, which is tied in with, people think when I talk about capital markets tightening and the lending market getting more difficult, that it just means instead of us borrowing money at 5%, it might be 7%. , but it’s also the loan of values go down.

So they’re like, all right, you can have 5%, but we’re only gonna give you 50% loan of value, for example. So those are the two main terms that are being moved around so that the lenders are basically getting a better deal, so that is consistent in this bar graph on this left side. Now average 66%, which, it’s all this is just averages right across the country.

But you can see where it was at the peak. 20 20, 20 19. Average LTVs were up in the 70% range. Now it has come down quite a bit. And we’ll end with this, the top 20 markets for four cast multifamily growth. This is from wealth management.com. Not saying that this is the all inclusive list or correct, this is just a guess.

But 20 Austin, Texas, and we’re working our way down from the top, from the bottom to the top. So Austin, Texas, Chicago, Seattle, Philadelphia, inland Empire, Los Angeles.

Portland, Oregon, Tampa, Florida, orange, Cal County, California. And then we get into the top 10 here, New York, where rents are going up. Raleigh, North Carolina, Boston Actually Boston’s number 10. Raleigh’s nine. Eight is Charlotte. Seven is Nashville. Six is Kansas City, Missouri. Five Dallas. Four is San Jose, California.

Three is Metro Miami. Is Orlando, Florida and one is Indianapolis. And that is the show. Folks, if you guys are interested in interacting with other high net worth investors, check out simple castle.com/journey. Our paid Inner Circle Mastermind. Say we’ve got almost 800 investors with us. We’ve got a hundred investors in the family office group, so not everybody joins.

But to me, if you’re investing more than a quarter million dollars, joining a group like ours is. Not only the only one out there for purely passive accredited investors, but it is, I think it’s insurance for investing with the wrong people and, but I’m big on like building the community where it’s more about the social connections within the group.

And then also check out my book and give us some feedback. We’re gonna be moving around this format a little bit. I’m gonna be breaking it up as today’s call was pretty long. And then if anybody has any feedback on the podcast things you guys like to see, things you’d like to see less of, feel free to email us at team passive cash flow.com.

And if this is the last time I hear you, see you guys have a great holidays. Happen in there, right?

 

 

Coaching Call: From 400K To $1.4M Net Worth in 2 YEARS + Ditching The Rentals!

What’s up simple passive cash flow? This week’s podcast, we are going to be talking to another coaching call. This guy’s got 1.4 million net worth and he is finally ditching the rentals. Now, I would say most of you guys who are investing with us these days, maybe not the vast majority, but. Little more than 50% of you guys have never owned rental property.

It’s funny over the years that this clientele group that ‘s actually owned rentals, like the guy we’re gonna have on the coaching call today. You guys can also check this out on the YouTube channel and it’s probably one of the better places if you wanna actually look at his personal financial sheet.

And look at that stuff. And as always, if you guys wanna sign up for one of these complimentary coaching calls reach out to the team at team@simplepassivecashflow.com. We can change your name identity. We can make it fun. We can be asking for a friend. We’re all, but like ditching the rentals, I think what most accredited investors come to the conclusion of the hardest thing is who do you trust?

And that’s why we say, come out to you. We’ve probably got maybe a couple more weeks or actually maybe a few more weeks until then Hawaii retreat. The Hui five is closing. We are pretty much filled up with family office Ohana Mastermind folks, as we always try and save like half of the seats for them, which means we do have some seats open for people who are not in our Mastermind inner circle to test drive the group out.

And we liked you guys to come out and check out the group once to see if it’s a good fit for. But after that, no, you gotta join. You gotta join the family office group. But my hope is, you come out, you meet yourself, you ask all the questions you want, and more importantly, you meet some other people.

You have a great time, and maybe you meet some lifelong friends too in the process. A lot of that can be very life changing to meet some other people along the path. Some things that I’m personally working on myself here. I was looking at buying a house. I know it’s crazy. I’ve always been a proponent of renting.

One of my big rules is, you don’t buy a house until your network is two or three times greater than that of the house. So if you’re looking to buy a $1 million house, Don’t do it till your net worth is two male female. Now, you probably think I’m a cold, heartless person, a house is something that is not a good return on investment and you can probably do better elsewhere.

And how else are you gonna get unbroke over a million, million and a half dollars net worth unless you invest in investment properties. And most of us in our group are not born from money. First generation wealth first, first generation to get over a million dollars net worth. I’ll be going into more details in the next week’s podcast.

I’ll be talking about what people do on, looking for these home mortgages and stuff like that for the wealthy. So it’s definitely first world problems, but again, if you haven’t yet, please join our investment club. That’s how you get the invites to our events. You guys can join there and check out all the past deals, including the pet fund, Paying out 12, 13% per year, or that’s a little bit over 1% every single month.

It’s in a debt fund arrangement where it’s a little bit lower risk, lower return, it’s not an equity side. And that’s what the market is giving us at the moment. Interest rates. Being sky high, and I can’t make deals work at the moment. So I don’t know how people are doing things out there.

So that’s, I’m just taking what I can get and that’s why the debt fund is becoming more prevalent as a product for us at this point. So if you guys want more details on that simple pass of cash flow.com/club book a call. I like I, we give out free complimentary calls. I wanna get to know each and every single one of you. Enjoy the show.

What’s up folks today. We have a gentleman Jackson here who’s been in a group. I think we met maybe a couple years ago. Or within the pandemic years. When everybody else was, had some free time on their hands and they could study this stuff, but he’s volunteered kindly to open up his personal financial sheet here.

And his net worth is approximately 1.3 million. We’re gonna get into this bunch of questions and I’m sure all of you guys are too scared to ask. I wouldn’t blame you. This kind of takes some gho to get on the internet or a podcast like this, but we also put all these videos.

We must have a couple dozen of these coaching calls. So Jackson is not the only one and we arrange these by networks. So depending on where you are, it’s just easiest to find, if you’re 1.4, maybe you find this way. You start reading down the page from there, but Jackson, thanks for doing this.

Why don’t you give a quick update on what you do for work and how old you are. And just so people get a little context. Sure. Yeah. My name is Jackson. I am currently 34 years old, married. I have one child, an eight month old baby boy. So that’s fun. Profession wise, I am a registered nurse.

I’ve been doing it for about 10 years now. Graduated in 2013, started off working in the emergency department in LA county. It is a very busy department. Just follow that path, right? Good benefit. Government job, winning that pension, the whole plan is to retire with that pension after 25 years and whatnot, but along the way I did pretty well for myself.

Moved up the ladder, became a charge. Nurse, went into management, got my master’s. Currently I’m a director for my hospital and at this point where I’m at after 10 years, I know that I don’t wanna do this forever. I cannot retire off of this and it’s just not sustainable. So I’m just looking for another avenue as far as passive investing and how to find another sense of financial freedom.

All right. And so Jackson, you’re actually rare. I would say in our group most people are, I would say are a little bit older than you and myself, probably in their mid forties. Other kids are a lot older right now. You’re what I call the BEU triangle of parenthood, where we don’t see too many people.

We’ve got. A bunch of Henrys who are young folks making six figures and, not a care in the world and buying Teslas probably. And there’s stupid Tesla whistles too, with their free money. But not many people have the bandwidth to look to doing something else when you have young kids.

At that point. What does your spouse do for work? What’s the situation bandwidth wise, yeah, kid. We actually met at work in the ER, I worked in adults and she worked in pediatrics, so she’s a registered nurse right now. This past year she’s taking care of our baby at home.

And currently going back to school for her master’s to be a nurse practitioner. Okay. And then, so between the two of you guys who likes their job, the least, that’s a good question. Neither of us want to be. A parent at home solely. So we do wanna work, but probably 50, 50, I think part-time positions for the both of us would be ideal.

Okay. So you guys both make pretty good money and it is maybe too early to really tell. It is probably what I hear from other people, what you guys will find is, you guys will keep doing your thing, but one of you guys will have a crappy boss and then that will probably be the front who takes the rent off first.

But hopefully that happens. Although it likely will, both of you guys make about 15,000 per if you guys were both working, is that kind of where you, yeah, that sounds about right, right now I’m making about 200,000 a year salary wise. If you work full time, she would probably be in the one 50 to 180 range.

Yeah. So together you’re definitely above that. $340,000 of just gross income together, this is correct. That’s if she was to work full time though. So right now, since she’s not really working and just focusing on school I think one of our benefits, especially this year is combined. We’re probably looking at 280 combined cuz I would hold the majority of it. Okay, cool. And I don’t know if you did that on purpose, but yeah, I think that’s good.

The only thing I kind of question is like, unless she really wants to become a nurse practitioner and make more money I don’t think paying the money for grad school and all that stuff is like a good investment, especially when you’re gonna see in probably the next five years, your net worth 1.3, male will probably be like two and a half and although two and a half is not there yet.

Yeah. You’re definitely getting over the hump. It’s at that point, you’re gonna be wondering like, why the hell did I do that thing for two to four years? Spending money to get it right. Not only time. But money too, to pay for that degree. I would say if, I don’t know how far along she is now, but if she doesn’t like it or if she’d rather stay at home with the kids or go back to work and just make a respectable six figure salary.

I would say pull out now. Unless you like it, but that’s true. That’s my thoughts. And then, and that clashes with what most people will say, most people will say, yeah, you have to get more because you’re going to be working for 20, 30 years. And then it obviously makes sense, to go from 150,000 a year to, I think they get paid 2 53 something.

And right. I think the master’s worked well for me because I got my master’s in leadership administration and nursing. So that helped me propel at least, get a stepping stone into the director position. So it was the cost benefit that worked out for me. I think for her as a nurse practitioner you get a transition into telehealth.

You could work from home a little bit more flexibility where as a registered nurse, although there’s different fields along with it most of it involves things like patient care hands on works. So I think with the nurse practitioner, it’s just a little bit more flexibility, especially now with this day and age of healthcare where telehealth is really on the rise.

Yeah. I buy that. I like that plan. And so like for you just so I understand when I talk to other people, so for you, like your, the masters was a way for you to get out of the field right. In a way, like actually teaching real people and getting yeah. Okay. I see that in many others, like a lot of our other investors, engineers.

Pharmacists, that’s the same trajectory they get off of the front line as I call it. And into the air condition. You guys are all air conditioned, but yeah, it’s kinda like the construction, it’s nice. It’s nice. When you need that higher level to degree to get out of the construction management in the field role to get a cushy job and just pushing numbers all day long, different quality of life, more freedom.

Yeah. Exactly. But for me in that paper pushing job, I don’t like it. So yeah. Ideally I would wanna do something else, but on a part-time basis, less hours and really just have my passive investments pave the way and help with that. Yeah. And I think that’s something maybe to think about in the future, because at least what I hear from you guys, health professionals, you guys like to interact with people because, you can see the benefit, where, I thinks true. That’s why a lot of engineers don’t like our jobs because we. See people and by you going into that upper level management in the healthcare, you lose that and you become sad, like all the engineers, so yeah. You lose the comradery for sure. I think as nurses, we do we share a lot of interesting stories and experiences.

So yeah, you’re right. That is a key factor to some of our satisfactions in the profession. Yeah, but you got, you’ll have options here in maybe five years or so. So let’s get into the numbers just to sum it up for folks who are listening on the podcast. And we do put this on the YouTube channel.

And then, like I said, if you join the club simple, pass cash, flow.com/club, you will get access to the simple page with all these videos on here, which you can watch all the videos, but net worth 1.3. If we look at the upper left hand corner here nothing really stands out pretty standard.

You guys. Your home and you guys are California, right? Yeah. Correct. Los Angeles. Yeah. So probably what, like a million, 1.2 million house, you guys owe 450, 8,000 on it. So we can talk about that. I think next but you guys are paid off half of it, which is, come to our events, Jackson and people okay.

Might be a little shamed by that, but that’s cool. We’re all learning. okay. Salary and wages. Like I said you’re the only one working right now. But understandable you get the kids. What I really look at is this net cash flow so I don’t know, really have any data on this.

I just use my own, judgment, but. Based on our community where your salary is, your salary should be higher. Because you only have one spouse working. I think you’re, you could be doing a little bit better, but, because you’re only fighting with one arm, basically saving 60 grand a year where you’re at is reasonable, and I guess that’s, maybe we circle back to that point at the end, right? What if your spouse cut bait on the whole nursing thing and just made a hundred grand a year. Now this pops up from 60 grand to 150 grand a year, and now you’re really moving, but we can talk about that at the end, if you want to notate that down.

Okay. Yeah, I was pretty conservative about it. I didn’t include my wife’s potential income. Also budgeted like 12,000 a year for travel expending, expenses. Vacations and things like that. That’s a part of our savings, but I just wanted to budget that out. So the net cash flow is really coming from me.

That’s what I plan to invest, which is not very much, and this is something freshly I’ve been going through too. Like you and I are still in our thirties coming out of our twenties. We’re super cheap. Any vacation over five grand is big. Yep. But then yeah. Yeah. You come to our event, you talk to the dudes in their forties with four, two kids, family.

They’ll tell you, they don’t go anywhere. That’s less than 10, 20 GS. You wow. That’s for one vacation. Okay. So something happens there. I don’t know, man. I just know when you go past that certain age or your family threshold, it’s just like stuff happens and things just cost three X, four X, then what you thought it was.

I like to be there someday, maybe in the next five years. Probably and then, you’ve got, so let’s break it down. Where is your deployable equity? So of the 1.3 million, I’m seeing half a million in your home equity in your house. So where is the other 800 grand or so those already locked up in investment properties.

I have 12 properties now, 17 doors, total. Most of them are single family and duplexes. So those equities, the 20% down payment and whatnot, those are pretty locked up. Okay. Okay. And then the real equity that I have right now is the Osborn road, the duplex on road, number two. That’s the one that I was telling you.

I was working on opening up a HeLOCK for it. Okay. Okay. So there’s 800 grand. Just here. I see you have some stock stuff too. Where did that go? Oh yes. I have a index. That’s my 401k. Okay. Did loan out 50,000 from it to put in a syndication deal but I have about 200, 150 left minus loan. Okay.

So like maybe 10 or 15, 20% of your net worth is in paper assets, the rest alternatives. Yeah. That’s how you do it, man. Everybody asks how much real estate should I get? It’s there’s no rule, but yeah. How much as it, it takes. Yeah. As much as it takes. And I suspect once your net worth goes over, five, 10 million, you, maybe you go back to this type of stuff, this stuff can get tiring.

And maybe talk to, so you acquired all this stuff in 20, 20, 20, 21. maybe for the folks. Yeah, I started, yeah. Tell us the story. Like some of the folks have never owned rental properties since. Okay. Yeah. I started my invest, my real estate investing two years ago at the start of the pandemic. Why did I even look into real estate in the first place is because I was a w two worker.

I remember Trump passed the tax cut jobs act. We couldn’t write off a lot. We weren’t getting any more tax refunds. And I was wondering why this didn’t make any sense. I read rich dad, poor dad, like a lot of the investors did, and we said, oh, you need to do some businesses, invest in real estate, something along the lines with tax benefits.

So long story short COVID happened. This was when I first met you in your podcast. I remember you were talking about syndications at the time, and you said if your net worth wasn’t less than wasn’t more than a million, then go find yourself investment property. And that’s where I was at right worth.

Maybe. 400 K at the time went through turnkey companies and they just kept, I did a cash out refi, actually cash out refi from my primary home used that debt to just continue to buy turnkey investment property 100 to $150,000 ranges, 20% down and just kept on expanding from there. And yeah, at this point I have 17 doors and force indication deals.

Wait so when we first connected net worth 400,000, how did it go up? Like almost a million in two or three years inflation. We had all these properties went up like 40, 50 K some of ’em a hundred thousand just in equity. So that’s what boosted to my net worth, yeah.

Cause you rolled that 20, 20, 20, 21 wave and then you also saved, I’m sure you saved two to $300,000 just from your saving. And your stocks went up a little bit. Yeah. Now you have too much money and now you gotta get rid of these things, these properties. Yeah. But that’s the thing, it’s all on paper, right?

Like now we’ve gotta go through here and sell all this stuff. Talk to me about what’s going on here this 50%, like you bought it with a buddy or yep. With a buddy. When I first started off, I did the first cash out refi took about 300,000 and it afforded me for investment properties out of state in Missouri, Ohio, Texas.

And then my buddy, who’s also reregister nurse similar mindset he wanted to get in on the deal. So I said, all right let’s go 50, 50 down payments. We’ll split everything 50 50. And that, that way I have 10 right now I have 10 conventional loans under my name. It was a way for me to, it benefited me because we are able to.

Put some of those loans under his name, so we can expand more and scale up at the time, when listening to the podcasts and stuff like that, like people talked about owning, 40 properties, 60 properties, but yeah at some point it gets a little bit too much especially with vacancies and evictions and the cost to turn over a tenant.

It, it does eat way at the cash flow. So on paper, it looks like amazing. I, I’m a millionaire on paper, but nowhere near where I wanna be. Yeah. I’m looking down your list here. It looks pretty higher end properties. Maybe they did inflate the prices a little bit, but you’re probably like B class.

Definitely not C-Class properties. So you probably do have a little, yeah. B class tenant profile here. What did, so you are buying this as a buddy, like you got the loans in all your. What was the deal? We split it. So I’ll get one property, put it under my name and then he’ll get the other property, put it under his name and we’ll just go vice versa.

Okay. Geez, you guys are quite tight to the hip now. yeah. yeah. He’s my business partner. He’s he’s my, a good buddy. He’s my best friend. Yeah. So what does he say? Have I talked to this dude? No, not yet. Okay. Now what I would do is I would sell all this stuff at a little discount to him and have him deal with this nonsense.

Okay. And just keep the note in your name. Cuz I mean you bought, you haven’t ran this stuff for very long. Like how many evictions have you had? Only three. And that all happened in 2020. Two only happened this year after the moratorium was lifted. So only three. Okay. I would say out of three evictions, one of ’em is gonna usually be.

Kind of a gut punch, like five grand, 10 grand, like a big trasher property. That’s been my, run rate. So you’re due for a while. Yeah. Yo, it, it happened the one on number four. The property that, so the 50% is with the partner and the one on top is what I own by myself.

And yeah, that one on tech I’m going to, I just finished the eviction. It cost me about 15 grand to fix just to renovate everything, change out the carpets fix the ACS mold and just, yeah. Whole ship bank, 15,000 down the drain. Yeah. Okay. I’ll just, experience share here. Like I had about the same amount of properties and what I did is I put ’em up on that I’m not gonna say the name, but there’s a website out there with a lot of turnkey homes.

And the great thing is that their buyers are really unsophisticated and. So they just, you can just, you can, it’s a great place for you to sell it. Okay. So you can just put it up there with the tenant, with it. Tenant did. So that way you don’t okay. Lose you don’t lose the cash flow and then that way you’re okay.

You’re in a great position cuz you don’t have to, you’re not desperate to sell it. So what I would do it, if it, your partner wasn’t involved right. Is I would throw all up on there for a slightly higher price, maybe 5% over what you think you should get or what they they’re gonna try and like arm wrestle you down.

So they can get their broker fees. Of course. Yeah. That way, they just sell off naturally, cuz there’s a sucker born every day that wants to buy turnkey rentals every day and have ’em just naturally sell off. But like when one of these go vacant, that’s your opportunity to put in 10, 15, 20 grand and rehab it and then sell it, like this and for example, the Caroline.

market value. 1 35. These are retail, right? Like you’re, you’ve got like full price. You’ve got like crap amenities in here, right? Like tenant grade stuff right now. It ain’t gonna sell for this much. Okay. That’s the hard thing about evaluating and it’s all beat up right now cuz you have tenants in there.

So it’s gonna be least 10 grand of repairs. But the idea is if this went vacant, then you fixed it up. You put whatever it takes and then it’s still a good market to sell. So it’ll sell quickly, but you take it off of that, investor website and you go, you find a local broker to sell it retail.

And then, you it’s real estate. You’ll probably get lucky and you’ll find like a a sucker retail buyer who loves your property because you use the right granite countertops in there. Okay. I’m actually meeting with the agent tomorrow. The one on terrace. In Columbus up top of number three.

Yeah. That’s the first one since it’s mine. Solely I wanna sell that one off. Okay. Okay. But do the, don’t you, don’t the thing is you don’t wanna take the tenant out of there. Okay. Yeah. If your agent can guarantee that this thing is gonna sell in two months or less fine, but we’re already talking like September, by the time you get this thing on the market, it’s Halloween and you don’t wanna be selling during that time of the year.

Okay. Especially where we are in the calendar month. But even if it was like March right now, we’re coming into the peak transaction period, I would still put it on the investor website, let it ride there and then just see what you get. And then that way you can be a little bit, you’re still getting great cash flow from this stuff in your.

But however you wanna do it, your agent’s gonna try and trick you to sell it with him. And it could, that’s the right hard thing is you gotta, it sits and he’s gonna wanna get the tenant out of there. And then you’re gonna cut your cash flow stream. That’s the situation you don’t want to be in?

What I would do is I would go into that meeting and say, either I get like some kind of guarantee that this guy’s gonna sell this property with X amount now. Okay. Or just create the relationship now so that when I do have this thing on the website for three to six months, and there’s no action and it goes vacant, then I can pass it off to him.

And he is going to manage my rehab for me. Do you have a contractor to do all this, like your property manager, the managers facilitate the contracting. Okay. So that’s another thing like you’re when you buy to these turnkey providers, you gotta be careful of sometimes the fine. that they’re gonna be, they’re get like first crack at selling your property so they can pick up the easy three to 6% commission.

Oh, okay. So make, before you start talking to other people, figure out if they got you at that. Okay. Typically those property managers are like the crappiest retail brokers. You don’t want to use them, but you may be stuck with them. Okay. Yeah. That makes sense. Okay. Yeah. I have my meeting tomorrow, so that’s good advice.

Yeah. If you have a good relationship with your property manager, you can probably have ’em waive that because they get it, and especially if, you refer them business, sure. They want you to be happy, but I would say that’s how the property management companies actually make their money.

It’s a total grind managing these properties from you. Like you don’t pay enough, I think. Oh yeah. Yeah. Eight, eight to 10% of. You’re talking like a hundred dollars per door, so yeah. For these days. Yeah. They, it’s a tough job, difficult tenants too. So what happened with me? I don’t know what’s gonna happen with you is I, so I did that and seven of my rentals sold in the first year, I think that was like 2017.

So tax wise, I had like quarter million dollars of capital gains, but okay. I had, invested in syndication deals prior to which that’s how I had all the passive losses offset, those capital gains. So people are listening to this. I don’t know why the heck you would ever want to do a 10 31 exchange unless you’re like you’re capital gains is like over two to $3 million.

That’s really the only reason why, I don’t know why anybody I know why they promote it so much. So they, the 10 31 custodians can make a thousand bucks or whatever , but like it’s a really bad strategy if you’re investing in syndications deals and you’re, you. You’re smart about how you manage your passive activity losses.

I guess Jackson, did you see, did you check up your 85, 82 form prior to this? Yeah. I have about 40,000 of passive activity. And then just this year alone, I know I can probably, it’s probably gonna be a hundred grand that I can unlock. That’s just, just sitting there for right now.

Okay. From like your, on your 2021 K one S then yep. And then not even including what did you do in 2022 syndication wise, 2022? I joined three syndication. One of ’em was with you the sanctuary on Broadway, but in 50,000 into there and some storage units and another multi-family apartment, they’re all about 50,000 each.

Okay. You had, prior to this year, you had 140 grand of passive. Is you invested another one 50 in twenty, twenty two. Let’s just call it, two 50 I think is what you should have. You should easily be able to easily absorb, three or four of these sales. Okay. But any questions on that?

How that kind of works? No. And then if I was to sell it, I could reinvest that into another syndication and that will also more, you get more, you’re seeing more depre. Okay. Yeah. Yeah. I figured so. And then it’s, the concept is you’re in an airplane and the noses is going up, but like just gotta make sure you don’t have no passive activity losses cuz after a while the people who are in dozens of deals, they start to get 300, $400,000 of passive losses and it becomes this kind of back room, joking area where everybody hasn’t paid taxes and like half.

A decade, or more Uhhuh . And now you see why, cause you keep right. Keep loading and getting more passive activity losses. And, I’m sure at some point you pay the Piper, but the whole point is delaying the tax bill for long periods of time. Over a decade I think would be pretty easy.

But but E even if so let’s just say one worst case scenario is you put it on the website and you just get, you’re like, crap, I put it for too low and eight of ’em sell, right? Oh, you have $350,000 of capital gains capture, your income isn’t that high.

And that’s, I guess that’s a bad thing, but a good thing is, if your income right now is 200, you could take a hundred grand additional capital gains in 20 22, 20 23. And. You wouldn’t really jump up too much. That’s not the end of the world. . And I say that because a lot of investors, it gets so freaked out about if I don’t have any passive losses, the world is gonna end.

No, your AGI will just go up a little bit more. And in your case, you’re around 200 and it’ll go to two 50 still, no big deal. You gotta, take it on the chin and move on, and just pay the taxes. Yeah. Yeah. Okay. And it’s not that much taxes. But yeah, it’s, that, and it, I think if you do it like that, it’ll naturally like you’ll exit out these things.

And that way you’re not gonna have, you’ll be flush with all this money to quickly invest. And who knows? This year’s already looking like it’s gonna be a slow year. For deals, right? I’m sure that who knows what 20, 23 is. I don’t know if you could adequately there’s always deals out there, right?

If you’re well, networked, there’s always deals out there. I don’t think that’s gonna be a problem, but you don’t, I’m sure like, God, like your yourself, you don’t wanna hold too much cash. Like quarter million thousand dollars of money is, burning a hole in your pocket.

You for a guy like yourself may actually spend it on something stupid, yeah. Like a Tesla I’ve been looking at Tesla. Yeah. Or a lot of Tesla whistles, but but yeah, that’s the nice thing about doing it like this, cuz they, random randomly it’ll just sell it NICES I guess.

But yeah, I, so I sold my, I sold seven of mines in 2017 and then two of ’em, two or three of ’em the next year. and then, and one a year after, something like that. That’s how it happened for me. Okay. The problem with those kinds of websites is it’s like a bidding system and you always get these stupid mobile offers that just totally waste your time.

That’s the frustrating thing about it, but, and you’re gonna get a lot of that, cuz you’re not a motivated seller right, too. Correct? Yeah. Yeah. Yeah. Cause they’re still, these properties are still cash flowing and I’m not in, in any hurry at this point. One of the things that’s like keeping me wanting to keep the properties is that I’m raising rents, like 20% on all of ’em.

So the cash flow, just multiplied naturally. Yeah. Yeah. Okay. Someone like you, I can tell this to most people put your earmuffs on. Yeah. We call this simple passive cash flow. And cash flow is great. But cash flow never created legacy wealth. It’s you selling these properties for 35 grand more profit than you thought how much months of extra $300 a month is that, let me do the math, extra $3,000.

That’s $3,000 a year divided by 35,000 or no, 35,000 divided by if one of these properties sold for 30 th $35,000 more than you thought it was. 30 years of extra, $3,000 a month. That is that’s 11, 12 years, Uhhuh. Yeah. Yeah. Uhhuh, like who cares about cash flow again, other people, this thing, forget I said that.

You’re seeing what I’m saying, right? Yes, Uhhuh. This is, I think what separate. Passive investors who work their day jobs from business owners, right? Who sell their businesses for four, five, 10 million wax like that. That’s what separates people who are in first class or eventually fly first class all the time, like yourself, to people who buy out the plane.

That’s the difference. But let’s get you to 10, $20,000 of passive income first, but that to point what it is like, that’s the sign of what is really like a sea wealth is like the big wax of cash. Like the syndication deal, you put a hundred grand in you, maybe you get this 60 grand, a hundred grand back at served increments.

That’s the big whack of cash. And after a while, maybe you’re seeing this extra $2,000 every quarter, that’s not changing your life one bit, even $2,000 a month that doesn’t change your life one bit. no, I’m still working. So yeah, you’re right. It doesn’t, it’s not a game changer.

Yeah. So same thought process. Like again, we use that to trick you to buy the rental properties initially, but don’t let yeah. Your rents are going up incrementally, then therefore you’re operating income should be going up, but that’s on how these assets are traded. And , that’s the good thing about selling these properties on unsophisticated investor base they’re idiots.

So they’ll buy on for rents. So you’re gonna be the beneficiary of the unsophisticated buyer. Yeah. That makes that makes a lot of sense that you said that. Cause I even have colleagues that, they want to get in on investing and they want to go into buying a investment property. That’s their goal.

And in back of my mind, it’s there’s a lot of risk to it. If you really wanna jump in this game, you need to go full force cuz one, two rentals. You put yourself at risk financially. Yeah. Yeah. To get ’em started. That’s the big thing, you’re becoming, taking that next step as an investor, obviously.

But , this is what you’re transitioning more to a credit investor mindset where you’re looking at things, not on a monthly basis or a quarterly basis. But on one year at the shortest, but more like 3, 4, 5 year time horizons. I was looking at a deal the other day on it’s like a crazy land deal, but it’s gonna take 10 years to come out of the oven and actually make money or put, potential to be sold personally.

I’m not there yet. I’m not willing to wait 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 years for anything. So 10 years, no money until you actually sell the property. That’s where you get your returns. Yeah. But I would like. Eight X, 20 X my money. Oh yeah. Okay. But I understand intuitively if you maybe find me in 10 years, I’d be all about that type of stuff.

. But at this point in time, I have the self awareness to, to say even though it’s good for me in the long term, that’s not what I’m looking for now. So you’re in the middle too, right? Yeah. The deals, because I’m taking on debt to invest in syndications. I need to see some kind of preferred return to at least offset any interest that I have to pay.

Another question too is, since I’m looking more into these type of deals, like how do you really know who’s a good operator? Like how do you know they’re gonna come correct and perform and have a full turnaround in that five to seven year? That’s expected, everybody’s a internet marketer these days, right?

Every. A silly podcast, especially after 2018, 2018, everybody’s got a book it’s just a, it’s a fake it till you make it game. And I’ve been around a lot of these types of, like ecosystems, where they teach people how to do this stuff. They slap the gurus face on the website and they pay the guru 20 grand and the guru hasn’t done shit either.

It’s, this is why I stopped going to a lot of these real estate conferences, cuz they’re all fake. Anyway, like the guy speaking on the stage, hasn’t gotten done Jack and I’m fooled. I have to ask some of my inner circle partners on do you know this person? So what I tell folks is at the end of the day, it’s all your network is your net worth, right?

Like why recreate the wheel on your own? Like how I did, I’ve invested with some bad partners and even as LP, right? Like I’ve lost money. You don’t know until you get into bed with people, but, or you expand your network and just follow your, your peers, your close, inner circle into, follow them into the end zone, have them tackle for you.

There’s two ways. Okay. And that’s why, we have over 90 people now in our family office, inner circle group, it’s a pay to play group. Yeah. But that’ll naturally happen from a group like ours. But it’s more than that, I think that naturally happens. It’ll come through in a conversation, but the people there, they’re more about building relationships with the edge, each other, who’s gonna hang out there in vacations or, hang out. People traveled, like that’s really more important because you’re seen already in five years, you just, all you gotta do is make 10%, or 8% you can probably put your money back in the stock market.

Like you don’t really need. These alternative investments, right? You’ve got that penetration. If you’ve got past that point of no return, 2 million to 3 million net worth, but the currency that you’re gonna want is the social relationships. So that’s my pitch for the family office group. If people are interested more, they go to support pass cash, flow.com/journey.

But to me that’s really I don’t think you’ve come to any of the events. Like we allow people to test drive it once and get a, a look at the people, cuz at least myself personally, like prior to 2016, I was, just doing what you were doing, although myself and until I found myself in a room with all these other crazy accredited investors, buying properties site unseen or doing syndication deals, I thought I was completely crazy.

And that’s what you need to, at least for once, to have the conversations, we can talk about this next, the HeLOCK thing. The, most people think taking on five, 6% on your HeLOCK is crazy. You like, like you said you said you need right now where your mindset is, you need to have a pre to cover it.

Yeah. But I wanna tell you the pre means Jack, the pre is not guaranteed preferred rate turns really means nothing in my opinion. But it’s just, you have to have faith that, or know via your network that somebody you’re working with is proven and gonna do what they say they’re gonna do. Or even in bad times, the assets still beats that certain rate.

But to this is something that, we can talk in theory on this call, but until you meet other people and, build relationships with them that are doing the same thing that went over this intellectual hump, it is, it’s just not gonna. It’s not gonna happen. I guess then you won’t find other things to invest in and and that’s the hard thing, right?

You are your five people you hang out with most. If you don’t have at least a couple other credit investors in that fi that five people, you’re not gonna go anywhere, you’re just gonna stay where they are. But that’s my big thing. And I think it goes beyond so like at the Hawaii retreat we have, we always gonna have like half of the people who are inner circle people, and then the other half are the people kind of test driving the organization.

They’re the ones coming in and, they, it they mix immaturely in my opinion. Like they come in and ask, who’s your lawyer, who’s your CPA. Oh, it B yeah. These people stealing money, what’s happening. And I get it. That’s the normal tendency for most people that do.

And it’s probably what you’re gonna do. , but what I’ll say is look what the more experienced investors are doing, right? They’re chilling, they’re meeting other people. They’re getting to know them personally. They’re not talking about money investments yet. , that happens privately at other times.

More naturally, right? But I think for most investors who’ve never met anybody. Who’s crazy enough to take money out of their home equity and put it into something that might make double or triple that, it’s new for most people. . we, I think that’s important to see that happen.

Firstly but for some reassurance, like that is what the mastermind people are doing. Like they’re taking out their HeLOCK at 7% interest rate and investing that in syndications. Yeah. This is the number one most common question. Cause the way you guys think about it. And I thought about, I thought it this way at one time, we were all taught to be good kids and pay off our debts, right? Yeah. So you have a hundred thousand dollars loan and you’re paying 5%. So what is that? $5,000 a year. Yeah. Probably for you, it’s more like double that right. 200 grand, 10 grand of interest payments per year. So that’s, let’s call it a thousand bucks a month.

That probably freaks you out a little bit. Like I got this a thousand dollars. It’s almost like a big car payment, but the way to think about it and it takes a while to get there is if with high confidence that you’re gonna make the Delta on that, you’re gonna be making at least 10%, maybe in 15, 20%, who knows.

Then it’s just a matter of. and you just had to eat that cost. And that’s where we look at, like the sum don’t look at the monthly payments, look at the sum. How long is it gonna take for you to get traction in these investments? If things go bad, maybe a couple of years like 20,000 bucks and that’s not that much money for the doomsday snare that you have to feed so what’s the normal solution.

Just take out 220 grand dude and just keep 20 grand on the side. Yeah. And then going back to the interest rate thing, that’s all it is. And I think you understand that, but logically, right? If you’re making, if you’re making 15% in your investments and those investments are also helping you save taxes too.

Which is also important to quantify, but let’s just look at it strictly from an interest rate or return perspective. If as long as your Helo is less than that with a. Minor safety buffer should be fine. Yeah. And, but it’s hard, right? I mean you’re well, what’s hard is cuz I haven’t seen a deal go full circle yet.

Like I’m invested se four deals, but I haven’t seen like the real returns where I could speak upon it with confidence, not like the single family homes where I said, yeah, I, I see rental increases. I see the market increases and I’ve experienced it so I can talk with confidence with it. Syndications is relatively new, but it’s more attractive.

Especially being a passive, very passive route versus the owning your own property. Yeah. But the owning your own property there just getting off of the Zillow, house up numbers, then it’s just. That’s all fake numbers anyway. And you have to actually sell it and go through some friction costs of rehabbing.

It and the commissions to get your true walk away number. But that’s, I think that’s, what’s hard for folks like in this commercial world, like there’s no Zillow on like our $40 million property. We’re not gonna tell you how much that thing is worth. We don’t know. That’s you get an appraisal or you get a real bid on somebody wanting to buy it.

That’s your price. But I think you, you have to just, out of those four deals, you’re in, I’m sure like out of, one of the four, something will happen in the next couple years right now it’s a standstill, right? Like it’s just not a transacting time. Cuz interest rates are a little bit spike now.

I think if the interest rates didn’t go up, I’m sure like one of the four for you would’ve cashed out or refinanced the next year. And then you’ll see. 30 grand just dump at least dump into your account. And then you’re scratching your head and it’s this is awesome.

Yeah. Yeah. This is awesome. Yeah. But like also that was my milk money or that’s, that was my interest payments for my 200,000 HeLOCK for, three, four years, and then now it’s that whole idea of now you’re playing with house money. Okay. And I, or you can talk to other people, build real relationships with friendships, if you call it and four, four of them can tell you this and you just have to trust them via proxy.

But yeah like I think this is the same thing with, I dunno if you’re doing infinite banking, but we have the same thing that happens in our mastermind group. Like guys will get a big infinite banking policy and they’re it’s same thing. If interest rates are the same, right?

Like four, 5%, although it’s. Tax deductible, but so is your HeLOCK should be tax deductible. But they’re like the same exact thing. Just change out the world’s HeLOCK for my infinite banking policy loan for myself, then they’re think, thinking, are you guys paying off your interest or are you paying monthly or you guys even paying off your loans?

And then I don’t even have to say it in that group. Like people will already automatically chime in, or we got like a private discord group too. No, man, don’t worry about it, dude. It’s just like the whole I HeLOCK thing. And then people, oh, okay. Same thing. Got it. Essentially, you’re just playing the same game as the banks, right?

The banks they lend their money out at, higher rate and then they , it’s the same thing. It’s just rate arbitrage takes a little while it takes liquidity for you to get the traction going. But you’ll get traction at some point. So that was my. Thought one of my questions regarding the HeLOCK is, should I pull out the money, invest it and then pay it down.

With the idea of once it’s paid down earlier than the five years to just redeploy again and again, could use it as a for savings. I would pull the Helo. I would get monetize all the money out of the Helo because the PLOS can get pulled at any point. And that’s why the helos aren’t ideal, there are a great way for people to get started and, you used it to get started, right? But I would say once you get proof of concept, either move into, move your equity into an infinite banking policy where they can’t pull that stuff from you and you own it, and the rates are better and you also get the life insurance component and the asset protection.

There’s just so many reasons more why the banking is better. Put it into there. So you’re just shifting your equity over. Or, but I think the problem there is now you’re like, oh, now I’ve created this large gap in my home equity debt. I have this payment. Yeah. But if you have the money in your infinite banking, you could just pay it off.

Do you really have it? Or did you just, create another hole for yourself? That’s displaced another gap. yeah. That’s cause the infinite baking, I just, I could just withdraw. I could just withdraw if I really needed it. Yeah. If you really needed to, if your grandma, great grandma got reborn and was, you were totally ashamed for having debt.

Yeah. You could just replace it. Okay. Yeah. That makes sense. I didn’t think of it that way, but yeah, that makes a lot of sense. Yeah. I get it, like you have this other payment and you think you have to pay it off. I tell people don’t worry about it. It sounds irresponsible.

If you have the money. Then, do you really need to pay it off? And this is the whole concept of other people’s money, right? If I, and in here, this is like where it clashes with some people’s really old school mentality. Some people either it’s an Asian thing or like an older generation thing.

They say at some point I want to pay down my debt, but from a money theory perspective, why, if you’re making positive cash flow and it’s growing at the end of the day, like you’re loan, the value, your debt amount really means nothing. I don’t know why people really look at it too much. It’s more about debt, surface coverage ratio and your liquidity.

When things go bad, it doesn’t matter how much equity you have. They you’re gonna shut down your loans and you’re gonna be frozen. It all matters how much liquidity you have. Yeah, right? Yeah. Yeah. Cause it’s all your equity’s all on paper. Yeah. I, this kind of was made very evident to me.

Like we have a one very affluent partner and he’s doing, he’s harvesting all this equity monetizing getting in his bank. He don’t care about the debt. No, the loan of value on his assets. He don’t care because he knows just like the last several recessions, when things get hard, you, they freeze your lines, you can’t get money out of it.

And they still want you to pay your debt service. . But if you have this boatload of liquidity somewhere, you can always keep feeding that. And it’s just a matter of time before things normalize. Again, you get out of there, but here the people have a false sense of security, right? They’re trying to pay off their properties.

What they do. You got 50% paid off or 80% or a hundred. In tough times, nobody, the banks don’t care. You’re you really should never get to a hundred percent, but you’re still gonna have a payment. don’t care. All they care you care about is liquidity and how much you can feed that.

So if you had 20 grand extra and things got really bad, that could feed your payments for two years. Yeah. That exactly does that. That should make you feel pretty confident, right? Yeah. I mean it’s a long time. I’m sure I can find another 10 grand if needed to take it another year. No big deal.

Yeah. That’s a different mindset shift. Sure. Different. It makes, yeah, it makes a lot of sense. Yeah. Most times people focus more on the percent of loan, the value but what it really is the liquidity and then how much cash flow positive. Of or debt service coverage ratio, which is a byproduct of how much cash flow you have or lack thereof.

Okay.

But in a nutshell, I don’t know, I do it, I don’t have a house, but I see a lot of other people doing it. Yeah. Yeah. But, and I did have one more question. So at this point, is it better to invest in like multiple syndications? Just weave it out, a bunch of 50,000 to a hundred thousand dollars deals or really focus on like the bigger projects or whatnot?

I think, I’ll just tell you what most people do. I’m not necess necessarily signing off on the strategy per safety. Sure. What most people will do is they’ll spread it around quite a bit, go with the minimums or, Of a hundred grand, if you’re over a couple million , get to a point where you’re pretty diversified, same theory as your rental properties.

Like you said, I think both of us would agree that one, the five properties is not enough diversification. If one goes bad, it’s gonna be sad, a little bit. Yeah. Be a downer for a few months, but right now you’re at, over a dozen or so if one goes down, you’re oh, that was a bummer.

Anyway. So same thing. Yeah. Think about it like that. Everybody’s a little bit different, maybe a dozen syndications, just try and race up there. Okay. There. And I think maybe you’re doing this too, but another like big beginner mistake is people will diversify into too many operators and too many asset classes.

That’s the, okay. That’s the normal tendency, it’s you’re unleashed in the Las Vegas buffet and you just get everything right. Just Chinese foods, pot stickers, pizza, pasta, seafood, you just go a little bit. You kind of people tend to spread themselves a little thin.

Yeah. Getting the trailer parks and multi-family storage units. Yeah. Yeah. Like this joker came up with my LinkedIn feed. That must be great. Yeah. Uhhuh. But that’s, everybody does it, I guess that’s, what’s cool about that is naturally you get experience and you parlay that into interacting with people.

And really my group is the only group that’s like that the rest of it’s just a bunch of like broke guys, trying to be general partners who are trying to fake it to the naked. Like they don’t have money. Interacting with those types of people is a waste of. , but like by actually coming in and saying, oh, I have a I’m in six indication deals, that’s some street cred.

Right there. And maybe one of ’em is not good doing good. And that’s more street cred too. Or that brings value into relationships. Or at least Jackson knows who not to invest with. But yeah, I think that, that’s, that, that kind of makes sense or, no, it does.

Absolutely. Absolutely. Yeah. OB obviously the more advanced people in our family office group, it comes, it came up a few times where, you know, some of the more experienced people, what they review is reveal is they went down that initial beginner state of a lot of deals, a lot of operator, a lot of asset classes.

And then once they see the deals turnover, or they, they just build certain affinities to certain. To people or, asset classes or whatever, and then they start to consolidate it down, maybe a factor of two. So if they’re, in a, in I guess the other thing that’s happening too at the same time is like, most people will test with a certain smaller portion of their net worth.

And then when it works, then you unleash the beast. Maybe you’re investing 300 grand initially, but if it, if you know it’s working, I know you’re gonna start to unload all this stuff. That’s a million, that’s and yeah that’s the plan. That’s what I have in my mind right now is what I have to do next is really just trade off the single family homes for syndication deals.

Take off something more passive and just let it ride. I’m don’t wanna give you advice, man, but of course, Understood. Maybe the direction you’re heading is, you get into a dozen deals at, the minimums and then you get, go through this first round of who do you like, who actually says what they’re gonna do?

Hopefully nobody steers your money. And then from there you decide, all right, I like this half better. And I’m gonna, do double the amount, a hundred, $150,000 minimums or two, quarter million or whatever. Okay. And you start to do that. And then but the other, that kind of makes you shrink your amount of your choices, but I would still, the other thing that I would think about is, and it’s good to like space out these investments too, right?

If I always thought if you have 24 deals, that’s always a nice number. I think I’m in like 80 or a hundred, it’s a little bit too much, but that’s this kind of what I do. And I’ve got staff to help too, for the. book. Not really bookkeeping, but just that one time a year, when I get a shit ton of K ones back, you have a hundred deals as a LP LP G P oh, okay.

Mean, there’s a check boxes on the K ones, but they’re never right. Like everything on the K ones never. I don’t know why have people that freak out? They freak out because they only have one or four K one S but those K one S are never. And I think I’ve talked to CPAs about it and the CPAs are just like the only important thing is like box four, or I don’t like the deductions one in your gain.

That’s the only important stuff. Okay. But I’m not giving you tax advice here. Of course. Of course, course, the, that’s why, if you have a you’re in most of these deals last five years, right? Yeah. On average. So if you’re going into a deal, a quarter, four times five, If that’s 20 deals.

So that’s why I rounded up to a couple dozen now. That’s I, the ideal, model, nobody ever hits that myself included, but that, I think that’s a good model maybe to be shooting for. So that, if we’ll do this in the retreat I got all ideas, imagine your perfect day. I’ll send everybody out to the beach and then, what does your day look like? Are you working or maybe you’re not right. Maybe you’re just doing the nurse thing a couple days out of the week, the other three days. , you’re just checking your inbox or connecting with other people socially, but you’re you try and find one deal a quarter, right?

Yeah. And then a deal exits early and crap. I have to redeploy it. I gotta, yeah, I gotta invest it now. Uhhuh. Yeah. But it’s not that hard. And that’s why if you have a good network, Okay. To be a passive professional investor, really shouldn’t take much more than like a handful of hours a month if you’re doing it right.

And you have a good network. And that’s what the vision looks like. Couple dozen deals. If you don’t have any hobbies, maybe three dozen deals, , I personally have a lot and cuz I like it. I’ve always been, some people and I don’t know what you play like fantasy football, fantasy basketball.

Are you the kind of the guy who makes a good silly in transactions? No, I let it right. I do one transaction a week and just let it, yeah, just maybe just fix the lineup. So yeah. We all have that one friend who just like, leads the league in transactions. They, yeah, they think that’s an award or something like that, but , some people like they like that, they like to, this is becomes fun for them.

Wow. So there is no normal. Okay. Sounds good. Also, if I was to keep some of these rentals let’s say down the line, I increased my net worth. I was able to go part-time for my nursing job. What’s the possibilities of be qualifying as a real estate professional. I don’t, I think that’s a complete opposite way.

You want to go? Okay. Just saying I’m going out of like almost a hundred people in our family office group, I would say only maybe half a dozen, like less than 10% of people have a handful full of rentals and the whole thought process. Can you tell me a good freaking reason why you would wanna own rentals if your network was certainly past where you are now?

Because you don’t, you’re not doing value. Add any of. No, you’re just a sitting duck floating around in the water. You’re not doing anything. The market goes good. You make a lot of money. If it doesn’t, easy come easy, go. have the liability of your property managers, stealing money from you, which to me happens a high prop, maybe a few percent of the time, most time people don’t even know about it, that they’re getting robbed.

You have the legal liability and then the debt zero name, which I don’t know. It doesn’t matter, but some people worry about that stuff and it makes getting home loans a real pain. I mean it, the only reason to do it is if you’re trying to go for rep status.

So let’s talk about that, right? Let’s fast forward a few years, where do you think your adjusted gross income is going to be? And let me preface it saying well, What if you guys had, this passive cash flow coming in from all these deals, you redeployed this 500 grand and now it’s making $5,000 a month.

So now your passive income is eight, five plus five, see what I’m saying? Like my income, our income will be less. Exactly. Exactly. And this is what I also saying, like, why is your spouse going and getting young masters? We talked about the reasons. But this is that phenomenon where like the more passive income you have, the less ordinary income you’re gonna need to make. So yeah. Right now rep status would be great. But at some point you start to shut off the engines and you start to make less ordinary income. So that rep status really only makes sense.

When you go past this red line three 40 and above, in most cases it’s not worth the brain damage. So yeah, I guess like, where do you think five years from now? Where do you think your adjusted gross? Your ordinary income is gonna be not including probably, yeah, probably a hundred myself. My spouse.

So 200, 200 each. What 200 total. Yeah. You’re not paying any taxes, man. Like you have no reason to do rep status, okay. Okay. Yeah. That makes a lot of sense. Yeah. Thank you for getting that out of my mind, cuz yeah. You listen to these podcasts and they’re all like, this is the, bonus depreciation.

All the benefits, so yeah. That’s why you gotta get off the, if you listen, been listening to podcast for more than like a year and a half, stop listening to podcast, read some books or interact with real people. Cause podcasts are just marketing tools. In my podcast, it’s the same shit.

Over and over again. Like we just, yeah. It’s the same stuff. Yeah. We just go over the surface. And that’s why you do these coaching calls cuz like I get bored and it is fun, deep diving into this, the 50th minute in right. Most times it’s just the surface stuff and people always ask oh we should have guests and but the guests are just gonna tell us the same old stuff and then, but they’re not gonna tell you the reason why not to do it too, which is my job.

Yeah, that’s true. Cuz you normally, the guests will just bounce around the different people’s podcasts and yeah. Reiterate the same thing on the education point, at least, reassures that I’m doing the right thing. But yeah, you’re right. It’s usually it’s pretty redundant.

Yeah. And this is where this is what makes this personal finance, right? Every situation, a little different. But again, this is like more like you gotta find other. To do this and that’s more sustainable way. And to get on the front edge of these strategies. But yeah, you’re heading enough to the, you, you’re that’s the way you wanna hand, right?

Less ordinary income, more passive income. So you can use the passive losses to drive the passive income down to nothing over this time you’re adjusting your ordinary income will go down and your AGI will go down. You’re burning leaner as we call it. I would say so I think maybe something for your family to think about is which way do you want to hit it?

Cuz there’s a few arch types here and I’ve seen this in our family office group. So this is when you guys are, she makes the big bucks, right? Like you option one is you make a lot, you burn a lot in taxes. this would be, if we go back to your personal financial sheet here, you guys get a much higher, bigger house.

You trip, you quadruple your vacation budget. And this is the idea of Hey we like our jobs. We make a lot. And yeah, we have, two kids and we don’t, we see often enough because maybe one of us works at home, but for us it just makes sense for us to just make a lot and spend a lot and yeah.

Pay a lot of taxes in that time. But they know, I think like the thing that I like is I’ve given them the confidence that they don’t need to be doing that for more than a decade. The other opposite of that is you guys kinda like we’re talking here and maybe that’s where you’re naturally guiding towards is like you guys working less, going down to, to, you’re making the efficient amount of income to pay the least amount of tax.

Yeah. Yeah, you don’t get to live large and vacations, but time is more important to you, whereas not your kids aren’t important on the other one, a lot of times the mindset or the justification as well. Our kids are in elementary school high school. It’s not like we can just take ’em out and to go to Disneyland or go and trip to Hawaii.

There’s only a few times a year. And we when we do, we take ’em out and we burn a lot of money. Because we make a lot, but that’s they feel like they maximize their time with the kids. So I would say for you guys, that would be the two bookends, and I guess there’s some in between, but you have to find, yeah, I think I would do both.

I think once you graduate, We’ll probably just try to make as much as possible, enjoy that living. But I’m giving it like a 10 year horizon where the passive income is really gonna drive the way and that’s when we’re gonna work less and spend more time with each other in our families. That’s the ideal vision.

Yeah. Until one of you guys dies, I hate to be morbid, but it happens, right? Yeah. But that’s, I think that’s where you are, it’s cool to talk to some of the older folks and then get their hindsight cuz there’s this concept of 18 summers, you only have 18 summers with your kid.

You’re probably you. And so some of these guys are at the end and they have three or four left and they’re shot. I wish I wouldn’t have done what you did. And so it ultimately comes down to choices. But like most people living the normal paradigm.

they just can’t, their choice sucks. It’s either for 30 years or 35 years both suck. Yeah. Yeah. No thanks. Yeah, but I’d say that’s where it’s gonna come down to at some point. And that’s why the network is important. So you have those types of conversations.

But either way, you got some time, right? And I think you’re ahead of the curve on most people. Just look where your net worth went from like 400, a few years ago to over 1.3, like I said, you’ll probably be around two, two and a half and four or five years at that point, you could probably pull the pin.

And then how old is your kid now? Eight months. Oh, perfect. I felt like a young kid to me. I don’t know. I’m not talking from experience, but to me, I don’t think they remember. These days, so perfect. You, yeah, you burn both ends of the candle now for another four or five years.

And when they’re four or five years old, then you can engage and do nothing. The memories that’s the thing you have, what people you are living the dream that people want most people, they wake up in their 41 42 and they have a 1.5 million in their 401k. And then they have to go through this three to five year journey to get to real passive income.

By that time, their eight year old child is now 14. It’s too late. It’s too freaking late. Yeah, it’s too late. I don’t know about building a relationship, but it’s too late to teach this stuff to the kids. I think at that time, past that point.

But hopefully when people listen, they don’t get sad and don’t wanna play Christmas, Carol and people. but, yeah, another piece is how am I gonna engage my son to teach him this stuff? And it’s tough. Yeah. I don’t know, man. I think if you engage in our community we’ll figure that out.

I I think it’s just time, right? If you’re not my family, like our parents were just working forever. Correct. Yeah. There was no interaction. There was no sharing of experiences. No it’s grind and to brag about, what you’ve done and how much you’ve achieved. Yeah. With so little, but apparently you’re going, when your kid’s five, you’re not gonna deal with Jack and you’re just gonna bother them all day long.

Certainly there’s gonna be some kind of knowledge transfer in that. Yeah. There you go. Yeah. But if not, that’s what the community is for. That’s where you send them up to auntie’s house or uncle’s house. So not let. It is from you, but some somebody else or yeah, the rich dad. Yeah. Or the rich uncle, right?

The rich uncle. There you go. . Yeah, but yeah, the close things out here. Any other last thoughts or questions? No. Oh no, thank you for your time. This is really enlightening and I appreciate everything you do and the education that you’re putting out. Yeah.

Keep up the good work. Like I said I was first introduced to you, two years ago. And, after reading your book recently, like it really resonated with us, we’re going through the same experiences. Yeah. I’m glad to see that I am going through that right path and I appreciate the guidance.

Yeah. Yeah. It’s just numbers here. I think that’s where most of the people who are good with their money and save it typically have to rein them back and save well, you can spend your money more, you can spend your time. more on like life instead of working so hard. So I think that’s the byproduct of this.

But yeah, thanks for doing this Jackson and for other folks listening if you guys are interested in doing this sign up for the club and then shoot a team at simple passive cash flow.com and email, and maybe we can set you up on one of these. We can change your name. We can make a name for you. We can, we don’t have to use your video if you’re scared. Thanks for listening to everybody.

How Religious Medi-Shares Works (Health Insurance Alternatives)

What’s up with a simple passive cash flow nation out there? And today’s podcast we’re gonna be talking about religious MES shares, which is these alternative health insurance. Items. A lot of you guys say you’re on the verge of quitting your day job, and the biggest thing is what do you do for medical insurance?

Most people out there are misled to believe that, you better keep having a day job so that you pay for your medical insurance. But something I’ve been going through lately is looking at. How much do these things cost? It can range from a thousand dollars to a few thousand dollars a month.

Seems like a lot of money for most people. If you’ve a million dollars net worth and you’re making 10% off that, that’s a hundred grand. And that’s a fraction of it right there. And, many of you guys listing as it mostly a credit investor base have probably two or three times that much, especially if you count the debt equity in your house or your IRAs not doing anything.

You gotta get it on the table, you gotta get working and, get it working in things that are backed by real estate and cash flow. So also other announcements before we get going here. We are getting into the holiday season, which means we are going into Myself and my team are gonna go into planning for the annual retreat in Hawaii.

That’s gonna be January 13th, the 16th. It’s the Huey five. So it’s like kind of the fifth big event we put on. Great event for you guys. If you guys haven’t interacted with our group to at least come out once and see where we’re all about, personally, I, my eyes were wide open and well back in 2015 when I started to meet other investors.

Up until that point, buying rental properties from 2009 to 2015, I thought I was crazy for buying properties, not for appreciation. Places like Seattle, California, Hawaii. And investing in these lesser known secondary markets, like how we do today with the apartments. If you guys are interested in that, make sure you guys sign up for the club@simplepasscash.com slash club as everybody has pre-vetted, right?

We wanna know everybody who comes as unlike a lot of, these other conferences you see out there where it’s a, it’s a fake it to make it group. Wanna be general partners. Our group is really the only one out there dedicated to purely passive accredit investors or LPs. We wanna know who is out there for obvious reasons there.

And we also wanna filter for the right people who are fun and who are gonna make a great experience. And, for people coming out to Hawaii to meet We’ve gotten great feedback from the past year. So anyway, if you guys have been to the password sheets with us shoot us an email team at simplepassivecash flow.com and be compiling those ideas from past participants and make it even better even if it’s just I wanna go.

On a sunset cruise this time, or I wanna go snorkeling, whatever. Let us know what you guys want to do or any other ideas on, one thing we’re big on is, we put people on small tables after they’ve gone through a couple days of getting to know each other and icebreakers and, getting that comfort built up so that they do feel comfortable opening.

And being authentic with other people. And that’s really where you get the good stuff. And unfortunately you don’t really get this with some of our other events that are like, a few hours or a popup here or there, or we just came back from Huntsville where we unveiled the new 230 unit Chase Creek Apartments, which looks amazing.

It something is real special when you get people to a remote location like Oahu in Hawaii which we’ll be doing in Waikiki by the. And then also when you get adults together for a few days in conjunction, things really open up and, I’ll say it for myself as an adult in my thirties.

Gonna be forties. It’s really hard to meet friends, especially ones that aren’t just living the old pay off your house and work to, you’re 60, 70 years old investing in the 401K nonsense. We’ve got a bunch of folks, a very eclectic group that kind of question the status quo and, doing things very differently.

And the sad thing is a lot of, for a lot of you guys listening, I was there at one point. You’re ashamed to do it this way cuz nobody, everybody thinks you’re crazy out there. But come to Hawaii and jump on board for that. I think I do believe the info page, if it’s not set up already, it may be set up.

Come next month will be simple Passive cash.com/ 2023 retreat is the signup form there for more information. But if that, here we go with the show.

Hey simple passive cashflow listeners. Today, we are going to talk about Ary programs and this is one part of our series that we’re going into healthcare insurance alternatives. After you leave the w two day job, and you’re not grandfathered into one of those legacy health programs after you’re retired from your employer, you guys can find all the show notes to this and the other.

Podcast we have had on the topic, simple passive cash flow.com/healthcare. But today I’ve got Jeff Anoni jeff, why don’t you give a quick background on yourself and then we’ll just roll into the material here. Yeah, absolutely. Thanks first. All thanks for having me on the show enjoyed meeting with you.

Yeah, that was fun. Connecting with you. I. I’m six foot five. So I didn’t really see you there for a while and somebody pointed you out, Hey, he’s down there. And I looked down there and there you were. But anyway that’s my humor for today, but but anyway I’m definitely not an expert on this.

I wouldn’t call myself an expert. I would call myself just somebody that was sick and tired of paying a lot of money every month to, for health insurance for me and my. And I decided do something about it, but a little bit of background about me. I’m a periodontist. I practice in Louisiana and about a year and a half ago, I started the debt free doctor.

It’s actually debt free Dr. Dot com site. And it was geared more towards dentist and physicians and other high income earners. About how to get out of debt, different ways that, that I did it, we were able to do it and then plus some basic investing. And now, I’ve gotten more into the passive investing, real estates, syndications, those sort of things that, that you teach your followers and your listeners and coaching members.

That’s a little background about me. There you go. Yeah. So a lot of, set the problem. A lot of people, they leave their day job and they leave this health insurance behind and something I’ve been looking into is there’s a cost to this and it’s not insurmountable.

And for a lot of people I asked who are in this financial independence path and investing in multimillion dollar deal. they they say, I asked ’em why don’t you leaving your day job? They say cuz of healthcare did you know that, that only costs 500 to a thousand, $2,000 a month potentially, and so that’s how we’re we’re gonna talk about one of those alternatives today, which is meta sharing. And so I guess Jeff, why don’t you define what meta sharing is? And how people use it. About a year and a half ago, we were paying $480 a month for my family. It’s my wife and I and two kids.

And we got a notice from our December. We got a notice from our health insurance that said it was going from $480 a month to $1,600 a month. I said, man, this is outrageous. And cuz at that time I had a $12,000 a yearly premium premium deductible, $12,000 deductible a year.

So I was pretty much not even using my health insurance cause I was having a pay out of pocket $12,000 a year. Luckily we’re a healthy family and we don’t have to use it that much, but I just didn’t. That paying now 1600 a month, like almost $20,000 a year for what you know, for nothing.

So I, I was like, there, there’s gotta be a better way. So I started looking around and I talked to other doctors, talked to, nurses just talked to other people, friends and I kept hearing this thing called healthcare sharing programs, or also called healthcare sharing. I didn’t really know much about it.

I’d heard on the radio a little bit about it started doing a little of, a little bit of research and basically what these organizations are. They’re not health insurance they’re and I guess the easy way to, to describe it. Cause I like to talk and analogies, cuz I’m from Louisiana, I’m just a simple dude.

But if think about you in your, where you live in your neighborhood. your neighbors and if one of ’em gets sick and they’re in the hospital and you look over there and their yard’s two feet high, you would probably maybe pitch in and mow their yard and help ’em out.

And that’s what, how this is structured. So when somebody has a medical need, people pitch in their money and share, and it goes directly to. Whatever medical bills they have that’s a simplistic way of explaining it.

So think of it like in your Colex sec in your neighborhood, but think of it with potentially a thousand, 10,000 people in that sharing program or even more, exactly. Yeah. It’s tens of thousands in, in a lot of these companies and just it’s growing astronomically, just because. How much the health insurance premiums have skyrocketed. And, like my first I was try and sharp shoot these things and I think what if to use your analogy in Louisiana, your next door neighbor happens to be a 400 pound guy who happens to deep fry, crawfish oil in powdered sugar and Oreo cookies and sprinkles and drink coffee.

How do you know my neighbor? My neighbor. Yeah. I don’t wanna be in his medical sharing program. No offense, but you would think that stuff happens, but it’s the benefit of not having to pay all these outrageous and inflatable health insurance costs. That’s where most of the benefit is coming from me.

Kinda. I really think that their cost are so much lower. because they’re because if you’re with one of these big insurance companies, like blue cross or, one of the other larger ones, I’m just, randomly choosing that and now, or all these other yeah. Even a Kaiser.

Exactly what I mean. Think about I don’t even know, but I’m sure you could look it up online. How many millions of dollars a year they spend on advertising. So a lot of your money that you would spend. Would go to pay for their advertising versus these healthcare sharing programs or ministries.

They don’t have all of that. And I think that’s one of the main reasons why they’re able to really decrease the amount that members have to pay. And not only advertising, but just, you think of corporate waste. How many of my investors are nurses and doctors and most of their times are not.

Helping patients listening, all the BS coding and all the paperwork that’s required. Yeah, exactly. I didn’t know a lot of these positions ex existed and people will say, I always ask what people do and they’re like, oh, I’m a coder for health insurance stuff, oh, that’s a, seems like a really boring job to me. yeah, exactly.

What are the other than like your healthcare company, is Medi sharing options, the only thing you found? I, there are different, there’s different companies out there. Medi-Share and Samaritan. Those are two the larger. These sharing organizations, there, there is, there’s probably, 10 or more, but I think they pretty much all work the same way.

So when you have a, if you have to go to the doctor, you have a, a medical event or whatever they have and I’ll just, and I’m more familiar with Medi-Share because that’s who I’m with. But I think that Medi-Share and Samaritan and then Liberty. Are probably the three largest ones, most popular ones.

And they actually have network providers just like an insurance company. And, with Medi-Share, they’ll actually give you an ID card and it has on there, your group number. And it looks just like an insurance card. So you go to the doctor or you go to the hospital, you get your work done or whatever, and the provider will send their bill.

And in this case to Medi. And then the, and the so basically the provider notifies Medi-Share, and then if everything’s approved, Medi-Share will transfer funds from other people. So every month you have, they have what they called. It’s a sharing account. So with health insurance, you’re paying every month, your monthly premium, in our case with Medi-Share every month you have, it goes into a share account.

So whenever somebody. Needs your money. It’s basically that money is shared with other people. So if if you’re out there surfing in Hawaii and you get knocked off a big wave and you knock your head on the surfboard, you go to the hospital and it’s gonna be $5,000. They basically just pull up $5,000 from other Chere members.

They will, pay your bills directly. What I like about it is, cuz if you’re paying, when I used to pay my money with insurance companies, I would just write a check and that’s it. But what I like about Mesha and these other companies, where your money’s going, it’ll actually say, Hey, your money’s going to help out lane.

It doesn’t say, what your medical problem or anything like that is. They will let them know, Hey, I’m actually, my money’s actually going good. It’s going to help somebody just like taxes. Think about how much taxes we pay. It’s just a was of the government. I would love to know where, my tax money is going to help, this a certain person that’s in need, but unfortunately it’s not like that.

Some of these really small medical sharing groups they’ll. Have you send them the money directly and you’re also supposed to give them like words of encouragement, right? You’re not one of those really small ones. Are you the, I know Samaritan is the other one is another main one. They actually will.

Your money. They’ll actually tell you where to send your money. They do it, it’s very seamless. It’s not oh, is my money gonna get there? Whatever, it’s but that was one of the reasons I like Medi-Share because I’m sending. My money every month versus Samaritan and maybe some of the other ones that you have to send to somebody else.

Yeah. But they have something called an AHP or an annual household portion. And what that is that’s like your annual deductible with insurance and there’s with Chere there’s seven, seven different ones. And it ranges anywhere from $500 a. To, I think like 10,000 or 10,500. So again, just like insurance, the higher your annual household portion, or your deductible is the lower your monthly premium or your monthly, share’s gonna be.

So basically, if you pick $10,000 you have to pay out of pocket $10,000 and then Medi-Share will kick in to start paying. And very similar to an insurance program. It goes through some factors, such as age, a number of people, et cetera, et cetera. So it’s fair amongst different participants.

Yeah. And another thing that I didn’t realize until I’d been doing it for a month, so we were paying $480 a month. It got jacked up to $1,600 a month. And then once I got Medi-Share, it went down from 1600 a month to I think, $330 a month. So it was actually less than I was previously paying. So I’d been paying for a year.

And then I started I’d gotten an email about, have you considered doing a changing from your standard monthly share to what they call a healthy, monthly share? And I said I don’t know anything about that. What is that? So basically what it is, it’s an option for people that are. Have a healthy lifestyle.

They’ll actually, if you meet the qualifications, they’ll actually have you, do, your blood pressure, your waste, me measurement, your BMI, your body mass index. So if you and I did this for both my, myself and my spouse, you do it. You verify it. It’ll actually lower your rate even more.

So now it’s, I think ours is $271 a month. for a family of four. Wow. So think about your savings. What it could be. Especially people that are retiring early, they’re financially independent, it’s a huge savings. So I’m looking at the website here and I’ll put a screenshot into the civil pass cash flow.com/healthcare, as you guys can take a look at later, so that kind of helps out the your poor neighbor there who needs to lose some weight.

Probably not gonna qualify for that nice discount then probably not. No. So right now you’re paying a little under 500 where I think most people who don’t have health insurance retire at age 60, hopefully they’re look probably looking at what, 2000 per family sort of the normal per month. Yeah. Yeah. It’s well over a thousand.

I mean it, yeah, it. From most people that I’ve talked to it’s anywhere from 1500 to 2000 or more, and we’re under $300 a month. It’s huge. And it also includes dental. They have a dental it’s included vision is included and then something that I haven’t used, but I know it’s getting more and more popular is the telemedicine.

To where if you don’t wanna leave your house, I think this would be especially good with kids. When you have a kid that’s sick, a lot of times you don’t want to go to the pediatrician and sit in the waiting room and pick up all these other diseases and stuff. If you know that, you’re just gonna get like a antibiotic or something like that.

So they, they have a telemedicine that they do 24 7, where they’ll connect you. With another doctor to see, is that something that they can handle online, with the camera looking at each other, or do you need to actually go in and physically see a physician? But, you’re paying like what a quarter or a third of what most people are paying.

And it’s just absolutely very similar to like people who buy a turnkey rental, they’re probably making about, I’d say 20 or 30% a year. On their investment. Then you look at the people in the stock market at, index fund. They’re making like five to 8% and it’s like, where did all my money go?

People are paying 1000, $2,000 a month on their health insurance yet you’re paying a quarter of that. Yeah, it’s like that, that’s all the money went to advertising and corporate profits and all this paying the salary of this coder who loves their job coding all day. Absolutely.

let’s talk about some of the cons of this a little bit. those three providers, you mentioned, they are all religious affiliated and you take us through some of the the, what are the things that they don’t allow and in kind of their methods, I’m pretty sure they’re.

Fairly similar. If you can actually go to the, Medi-Share is the Christian care ministry or CCM is the company that has Medi-Share and they actually have a, they actually have a statement of faith on the website and yeah you basically have to be a believer. You have to. And like I was telling you before we started our conversation, they’re not gonna come and follow you around and make sure you’re not smoking and drinking.

And, doing all this stuff that, that you’re saying that you’re not doing, but you basically just have to acknowledge that, follow their rules. I’m not gonna use illegal drugs. I’m not gonna abuse alcohol. I’m not gonna, you. Do I think tobacco sex outside of the marriage, that sort of thing.

And you basically just have to sign it. That’s how it is with Meere and it’s, that’s probably how it is with the other ones as well. So that’s really the. The only qualification the main qualification, which I guess for what you’re asking it, it could be a negative for some people disadvantage.

Again, it’s not a, another con I guess that, of these, again, it’s not a health insurance company, so I’m really not sure, but I think there may be just a handful of states. That still don’t accept it. I think most of them do now, but there may be just a few. So you may wanna just check with that.

I think there are certain restrictions regarding preexisting conditions, very similar to health insurance. I think before you had to be in the program before becoming pregnant, but I think that maybe have changed now. I’m not a hundred percent. But whenever I got into it almost two years ago, that was the case.

some of the preexisting conditions, like diabetes and things like that they may just have to have you pay a little bit more, again if you’re healthy, you’re gonna pay less. If you’re not healthy, you’re gonna pay more, very similar to insurance. Yeah. Yeah. Not different than insurance.

I think. Probably the main disadvantage for us. Whenever we switch, we had a health savings account. We had a high deductible insurance policy that was, associated with a health savings account. With these types of organizations, you cannot use a health savings account. But again you’re saving so much money.

What I did was just took the difference and, put it into a fund or something like that, cuz it’s gonna be a huge difference. I don’t even contribute to my health savings account anymore. I’d rather just invest it. That’s a that’s my own choice. Another con to this, is they don’t, they won’t pay for certain procedures that aren’t really aligned with the faith, right?

Like abortion or whatever. Correct. I would check out their website for you guys and we’ve got some of these, the major rules. I’ll cut and paste into the show notes. But yeah, I think, like this is just an option for folks and, Jeff and I are not giving financial advice.

And if you get a health sharing program, They they don’t pay for something don’t come and Sue us. Jeff. , it’s just exactly, I’m just telling, I’m just sharing my experience with them. I’m a customer for them. I don’t work for them. Another simple way of saying this, cuz everybody is familiar with this.

This is nothing more than crowd funding for healthcare. Think of it like that. But oftentimes the things that if you find yourself on the side of majority, it’s time to pause and switch directions. Yeah, absolutely. and have you heard of any issues with them not paying for certain procedures or just any difficulty them fighting any claims or in your experience?

From my personal experience we’ve used it. We’ve had a couple of issues, I have two boys, so they’re always having issues with sports and with going to the orthopedic doctor. So we’ve had some, x-rays and actually, I just had an issue with my knee.

So I did an MRI. We had a little procedure for my son and. They pretty much covered, everything that they said that they were gonna cover. It was very easy, very seamless. I actually did some research before I joined and got online and there may have been like just maybe one or two instances where, something didn’t get paid or whatever, but 98% of the reviews that I had read, they were all.

But again, like you said, not, I’m not saying if you apply to one of these something could, happen like that, where they may not pay, again, I don’t work for the company, but from my personal experience from talking to other people that also had it plus looking online, it was all very positive.

And it’s not like health insurance haven’t snaked their way out of claims themselves. So E either way you. I deal with dental insurance every day. Being a periodontist. When I say deal with it, my staff deals with them. And I actually, I’m not gonna name any names, but I personally know people that are dentists, but on the side they work for these dental insurance companies.

And I’m sure it’s probably the same way in health insurance, because for dental insurance, you have to submit your x-rays. You have to submit notes and all that, which again is similar to health insurance. You have to have a healthcare provider, look at everything and go, okay this person is saying that this patient needs X, this procedure, I’m go, am I gonna prove it?

Or am I not gonna approve it? And these people that are dentists that actually work for the companies they tell them to stall. That’s their stall tactic. They want to delay it. They want to drag it out. They want to keep saying, oh, I need more information. I need more, this, I need that.

So they, they want to keep your money as long as possible. So it’s growing, they don’t wanna pay right away and that kind of stuff doesn’t happen with these organizations. That’s from my experience of dealing with these, cuz we call ’em daily for patients and it’s always, Hey, we need more documentation.

We need more charting. We need more this or that. And it’s just a stall tactic. The person that gets hurt the most is the patient because they’re frustrated, they’re paying all this money and they’re saying I’m paying all this money every year and they’re not even paying for anything. Unfortunately the patient’s the one that gets the worst, the shortest end of the stick, so to speak.

So I’ve actually talked to another guy probably gonna have him on another podcast in the future, so we can dig into this subject more, but, see he said the procedure on these medical sharing programs is you figure out what you guys need and then you submit it to the company.

and then there’s a little bit of procedure making sure that, Hey, are you going and getting the best pricing, is this what you really need to solve the problem? And then at that point, they try and expedite this as much as possible. So that the most important thing is you getting the treatment and getting it knocked out, but you’re essentially a cash pay person.

That’s what he’s kinda said. Yeah. That’s our experience from visiting with the orthopedics, they Metha contacts us very quickly. They want to expedite it. Like you said, they want to get it paid and it’s, it’s more beneficial. They’re just trying to basic, it makes it more beneficial to me, the patient.

Versus, delaying pain. Yeah. And this even works for you say your son goes to the dentist for a cleaning for his teeth, something as small as that is that what’s the procedure there. The same thing, the dental you you could be a provider just like health insurance, so same thing, the.

Is going to get their money when they’re supposed to, but more importantly, the patient that gets their teeth cleaned, they’re gonna get that paid for quicker instead of, having to wait and wait on the explanation of benefits, caught an EOB form that they send out and it’s just delayed and delayed.

So the procedure is your son gets a cleaning. The bill, the invoice gets sent to the Mesha company. Okay. And then that billing gets taken care of there. And then your share that you need to pay if any gets sent to you no different than how the insurance company works today. Correct. Okay. All right.

But anything else you think we need to cover on this subject? Jeff? I have two articles. One of ’em is about Medi-Share and then one of them, because people started emailing me after I put that article out I did the I also broke down the differences between Medi-Share and Samaritan, which at the time, when I wrote the article, again, those were the two biggest healthcare sharing.

Groups out there. So I broke each one of them down and had the differences between the two and again, the advantages and disadvantages of the two. I would encourage people to do your due diligence, take a look at ’em. If they want to contact me more than happy to contact me.

And again, I’m just would tell them exactly what I’ve been telling you just from my personal experience. and be more than happy to help them if they have any further questions about it. But it’s just been a great thing to free up so much annual extra money every year, I’m still working.

It still is a big deal, but I’m still working, a lot, like you said, a lot of your listeners that aren’t actively working anymore and living off the passive income, this could be a huge financial. Boost to them every year. Or more importantly, just that one last excuse why you shouldn’t be working at your day job when you got all this cash flow to replace your W2 income.

So thanks for joining us, Jeff, I’ll link up in our show notes here simplepasscashflow.com/healthcare. I’ve also got medical or Medicare information, the podcast we did there. We’ll get one of the providers here on the podcast too, in the future. But go ahead and share this with your guys, folks.

If anybody who is nearing retirement, doesn’t have health insurance. There’s definitely a option that I’m going to go down myself personally. Talk to you guys later. Thanks for joining us. Thank you.

Elderly Care Home Alternatives With Alison Lee From Brightstar Care

What’s up folks. We’re gonna be talking to my friend, Allison who runs a business that helps folks like yourself, trying to find care options for our elderly parents. It’s gonna offer some other options. I didn’t know that was available. Other than sticking your parents in the care home that costs a fortune.

This allows them to age in place, which I think a lot of folks do like because they like their home. And I think it sounds like a great option, at least for myself. Now, if you guys are new to our group please sign up at simple passive, casual flow.com/club.

You get access to a lot of free e-courses, including the infinite banking, eCourse, and a lot of other syndication LP material that will help you in your investment journey.

Now, just a little bit of an update, I’m sure you guys are all aware that the interest rates are going up. We’ve tapered off our acquisitions being a little bit more picky and choosy as of the last couple of quarters. I’m starting to see a lot of the bridge financing, the smaller banks restrict a lot of their lending and this is, Prior to that.

A lot of the big Fannie Mae Freddie Mac lenders started to do the same. So the trend is, bank financing or what we call the capital markets is constricting, which is making it harder for a lot of commercial operators to make these deals work artificially put the price down.

And we could probably say that there’s a little bit of price discovery. Happening at the moment. Good news. Rent’s still going up. It’s a good time to be buying real estate, especially if you’re looking to get money from other asset classes like your stock market or your debt equity in your house into stuff that works and makes sense.

And it’s backed by real estate. And this is why we started the pre-equity plus fund. If you guys want more information about that, you. Join our investor club at simple passive cash flow.com/club. It really allows means to hedge the economy and get more on the debt side as opposed to the equity side.

Equity is great for realizing higher returns, but debt is a little bit more of a defensive strategy, which we’re getting more attuned to. And we’re seeing it as a bigger opportunity for us. Especially as, like I said, the capital markets freezes up and people are really looking for that.

First person on the capital stack, which we can hopefully provide for people or ourselves in the future. So again check out that opportunity. We’ve got that first deal in Manhattan, right across that hard rock hotel in Times square. You guys can jump on board that and own a piece of history with us. Go to simple passive cash flow.com/club. Join us there. I wanna get to know you guys, just hop on the phone for an intro call and enjoy the show.

All right. Hey folks lane here with my good friend, Alison Lee, we are in an entrepreneur group together and we’ve gotten to know each other pretty well. So as you listen to podcasts and people normally say my friend dot, that’s just codename for, I just met the person a little while ago, but here I’ve known Allison for probably over a year now.

And. We know each other pretty well, and she just happens to own a bright star care franchise. So I tricked her into jumping on the call today and giving us the insider’s perspective on what are you gonna do with your elderly parents? Because all you guys out there are the ones who are good with your money.

It’s not your other brothers and sisters who are trying to keep up, but it’s ultimately gonna fall on your hands and what the heck is gonna happen with mom and dad. But yeah. Welcome Allison. Thank you so much for having Elaine. Yeah Allison works out of Honolulu, Hawaii, and she caters towards folks on the island of wahoo for the most part.

Correct for now? Yes. We’re hoping to expand to new islands. Maybe just give us a little idea, just some context of what you guys do for folks. And then we’ll, we’ve got like a list of questions that most of you guys will probably think of out there, as you’re trying to plan the end of care options for your parents.

But yeah. Why don’t you give an insight? What the heck is a Bright Star Care Okay. So like you said, we’re part of a national franchise, but each franchise actually has the flexibility to focus on a variety of areas. So some locations are more into staffing. Others do a lot of skilled nursing.

We happen to do a lot of private duty home care and skilled nursing, which basically means it’s out of pocket care. So it’s not covered by Medicare or Medicaid. It’s private pay or long term care will cover it. That’s the majority of what we do. So what we offer is a full spectrum from just companion level care.

Which is like, Hey, keep mom company, make sure she turns off the stove, that kind of thing. To hands on, help my mom take a bath, get ready in the morning, help make sure she eats, make sure she takes her meds, that kind of thing. And then all the way to we each we do have some skilled nursing care.

So we do a lot of wound care and things like that. And this is the problem for somebody like us, trying to figure out what our parents are gonna do. Like they may be okay now, but that’s the big unknown is like, how are they gonna be in five years, 10 years, 20 years? That’s what makes planning so hard for our parents. And then of course, even for ourselves, I think then the more I’ve done this business, the more I’m aware of okay, we really have to make a plan for this.

Maybe outline the traditional options for folks. My understanding is it’s, you’ve got the care home and maybe there’s a couple different levels and in-home care, but what maybe like the array of options. So I think depending on socioeconomics, there’s a vast array, but I think for your audience it’s probably gonna be more on the higher end. And so there’s where it’s not, you’re not depending on Medicaid coverage, that sort of thing. Although there are those options and some people.

Do financial strategies so that they qualify for that as well. But mostly the people that we are dealing with they’re looking at either aging in place at home or going to an independent living facility which really is more of a senior community lifestyle thing where they’re still quite independent.

Other people are more against it, they need a little more care. So they’ll go to an assisted living facility. And then there are what they call CRCs which is a continuing care retirement community. And that is where you have the whole spectrum. Again, you go from independent to assisted to skilled nursing.

Those are options. And like you said, there are care homes and other things like that. And then what we do of course is the age in place. So you really have a caregiver in the home. Some people do it with their own family members or friends or volunteers from churches or other people will, take the risk and do a private caregiver that they pay out of pocket.

Before we go into that agent place option, I think most people, myself included, thought like the major option was you go into a facility, you pay an arm and a leg. You, if your net worth is one to $2 million, you have to do a reverse mortgage to get in.

And you hopefully they give you a bottle of loop for how much, if you pay for that place and you, hopefully you maybe get a portion of that back . But if not, That’s what it is, right? Like it’s a big financial transaction. Yeah, so I think like the ones that you’re probably talking about are like here in Hawaii, we have Kaha Newi, which is considered the premier high end place.

An Arcadia. I know your listeners are from all over. So those probably won’t resonate, but yeah. Or like a Plaza is a national chain too. But that’s a little bit more mid tier, I think. So it’s, so the Plaza is assisted living, so you I think and independent. Yeah, so it’s more mid-tier and I don’t believe they have skilled nursing.

So if your needs were to exceed personal care, it would essentially kick you out. You’d have to find you’d have to go somewhere else. Whereas the CCC seeds, you can stay in place there. That’s the selling point, right? You have to, you’ve bought in, you’ve paid an arm and a leg, maybe two legs and you’re in there and now you don’t, it’s a set it and forget it in, in your mind and in theirs, yeah. Yeah. And here, there tends for the very good ones, like Kaha Newey that I mentioned, there’s a three year wait list. So who knows if you even ever get to that point? It’s our it’s like investment deals. No, you can’t get in, or like a really good club dance club I’m talking about, right?

Yeah. Make you want it more yeah. And pay more, yeah. As a. Good shopper. And I think a lot of our good consumers out there, we don’t like that. And we inherently makes the hair in the back of our neck stick up but then when you and I were talking, I was like, what did, tell me more about this agent place?

Because personally, what I’ve seen out of my family is, like the, usually the guys live a really long time and they’re usually pretty grumpy and they don’t wanna go interact with people. They’re not the most social of people. And myself included. I think when I get old, I might wanna just hang out with myself with my fancy things around me and my big house and nice view and that’s where this Asian place option comes, where you guys come in, right?

Yeah. So obviously I’m biased. But I think it’s really, for people who can afford it’s to me by far the best option in terms of. Outcomes mentally and health wise to be in a surrounding that’s familiar, especially, a lot of seniors start to have some form of dementia or Alzheimer’s, and those familiar surroundings become really important.

And it’s just a completely, you’re on your own schedule. The care we provided. I’m sure other providers also provide is very customized, very personalized. It’s very much about we’re here to serve you in your home, the way that you want to be served. You wanna eat breakfast when you wanna eat breakfast.

That’s when you’re gonna have breakfast. So you know, it’s a different it’s also, an arm in a leg, cuz we’re providing one on one care. You get a caregiver all to yourself. We have backup caregivers cuz you know, we do have to follow employment law, but the good thing is that means if your caregiver’s out sick, we still have other people available usually to come and provide the support.

But we’ve seen both. We’ve seen people who have transitioned to a facility or we’ve seen people come out of a facility and generally speaking, most people wanna stay at home if they can. A lot of these facilities are beautiful. They look like hotels. They’re very impressive from, our perspective, but there’s no place like home.

Some people have their really extra comfy chair and they have all the things that they like at home and their facilit just can’t replicate that. Yeah. And I’ll say from like a money perspective to most people, they, have a million dollar plus house they’ve probably more than exceeded the $250,500,000 home exemption on the sale of the house.

So if they sell the house now to harvest the money, If they don’t do a reverse mortgage to get into set facility, then they’re gonna be paying a boatload in taxes where it sounds really morbid. If you’ve, if mom and dad bought a house for 300 grand and now they’re sitting on $1.2 million, the $500,000, if they’re married, couple will only take you up to what I say, like 800 grand, and they’re gonna have to pay taxes on the rest.

So you have to pay taxes on 500 grand. You probably lost a hundred, couple hundred thousand bucks right there in taxes. So it makes sense from that perspective, if you’re on the fringe to just stay in place and die in the house so that you can get the step up basis. But nobody likes when I talk about money at death and stuff like that, but maybe let’s go over like the pros and cons of the care home, the way I see it, the care home you get, like the social aspect. Of it and it looks cool. It’s like a country club feel, but that in house, it, correct me if I’m wrong, but don’t you get like a dedicated person, where they’re still playing. So defense on you in the facility, aren’t they.

Yeah, for the most part we have we sometimes, if the care needs are not super high we’ve had couples care where they’re, our caregivers providing care for both husband and wife. I also have thought would be an interesting concept for people to do golden girls style where, if your parents have a really nice home with a lot of space, let’s.

Moms passed away or dad’s passed away and you need a caregiver, mom or dad wanna stay at home. Why not get a roommate who needs care and then they can split the cost of the caregiver. So there, there are ways to be creative about it. Get some rental income. Of course, if you’re a grumpy old guy who doesn’t wanna talk to people, maybe you don’t want someone in your space, so

Yeah. But if you don’t got money, you don’t got choices, right? Yeah. Yeah. So there are creative ways to stay in place. Yeah. And I guess your guys’ services might actually make sense too, for a sparring assisted living investment operator who has a house. Can’t work. The the caregiver angle just find a group like yourselves to outsource that part out.

But what as far as like Costco just generally speaking, what would like top tier care home costs on the high end and maybe low end. And then what would be that this option of the in-home caretaker costs high end, low end, so it’s in terms of the facilities.

So there are care homes, and then there are like the plazas where there are like large facilities. So care homes tend to be smaller. I don’t have the exact pricing on those, but in terms of like the Plaza or something like that it ranges the last I checked from 6,008,000 a month. And that’s for like I said, like a mid-tier versus the CRCs, the continuing care retirement communities.

Those are the ones that you were talking about, where you put down this massive chunk of money up front. And then on top of that, you’re paying the monthly fees. So for us, for PRI for home care, private duty home care, At any given point in time, it is what it is, but I can tell you that it’s been going up and up very quickly.

Yeah. That’s why people need a best, cause it’s probably gonna go up 10% every year. That’s gonna do it with yesterday. It’s like college tuition. It just, yeah. Worst. I guess college is the worst, right? Exceeds the market exceeds inflation, no matter what. So right now for us, it’s very like each company sets their pricing their own way for us.

Ours is very customized. So if it’s a range from 34 90, an hour to 44 90 an hour, generally speaking it can get more expensive, but most of our people are falling around 38, 90 an hour. But is that per month about, or, cause they’re not doing it full time. Some are. Yeah, we have some that are around the clock care.

So I haven’t done the monthly S see I’m is 2000, I think, our business owners will know that right off the top of their head. I should know this, but so 6,500 a week

What is that 20? I don’t know if I’m doing my math right here. Yeah, like 28,000 a month. So yeah, it’s it gets up there. If you’re now that’s again, that’s 24 7. So one of the beauty. The beauty of in-home care is most people aren’t starting off with 24 7. A lot of people will say, Hey, I just need six hours a day.

And then most companies will have a minimum of at least four hours or six hours. We don’t have a minimum, but we have a flat rate if it’s less than four hours, just because to get caregivers. Drive where they’re going spend the time providing the care and things like that. They need to be compensated.

So we have a flat rate for yeah. Anything less than four hours, but just comparing like the high end, right? Like you’re you need the max care 20 grand a month. That’s on par with the top, what the top facilities are charging. But then you also have to put in the fact that you put.

An arm and a leg and two legs, or like a million dollars essentially. And a million dollars. The way we teach it to folks here, it’s like there’s opportunity costs with that money. You could be growing at 10, 15%. That’s 150 grand a year, $15,000 a year. So it’s really 20 plus 15 a month. So like 35 GS a month.

When you take into account that. Most people suck at investing, so they don’t hardly make anything off of it. So I guess it’s 20, $20,000. So then it’s equivalent, but it’s all the usage of your equity I think is well, yeah, I think so. And actually, so it’s more like 28,000 a month, just wanna be honest.

And I always tell people it’s definitely a premium option. It’s a high end option that, not everyone can afford it and that’s okay. There are good options for people. Yeah, but there is also, we don’t, like you said, we don’t have the upfront investment. And then what if you go into one of those facilities and then they die a month later there is a big loss I don’t know all the, like when you can get your money back, et cetera.

But I know that there’s a kind of, they’re promising, they’re never gonna abandon you. And, but it’s like insurance. So you essentially is a pseudo life insurance place that they’re doing. And I’m sure they outsourced the third party insurance companies for that. But they don’t like, to break down like the levels of care, you don’t need to go to that high end 20 something grand a month.

There are other. Maybe talk a little bit about some of the mid tier and like the low tier place options or arrangements that you’ve seen people do in certain situations. Yeah. Like I said most people aren’t starting with 24 7 care and a lot of people don’t ever get to 24 7 care. So some people are eight hours a day, five days a week.

So someone’s there watching. There’s also, we didn’t talk about adult daycare is an option for people too. So if you’re going to work and you want mom to have a place where she’s looked after, and there’s a little bit of stimulation there, day cook daycare centers, just like you have for your little kids.

And often they’re connected. There’ll be like a preschool, right by an adult daycare center. . And so that is generally a much more affordable option. But you guys don’t set people up with that. That’s just another option. No, yeah that’s a different option, but just in terms of, so we’ve had people though who will go to adult daycare and then come home and then we provide care in the home at night.

So you can, find combinations of support or. If you only need us on the weekends or, certain days of the week, so really mixing and matching it’s much more flexible and customizable. I don’t know if you can think of some like typical client profiles, but like when would somebody do like a 5,000 a month?

How that get ’em and then maybe that mid-year I guess cause people come to you and you hear their situations, and then you’re oh, you don’t need that high end or that much time or hours, or you don’t need that. You don’t need the skilled nurse. You can just have a general caretaker, which is a lower, hourly rate.

I wanna be clear. So the skilled nursing is much more expensive, so I haven’t even given skilled nursing rates. The rate that I share is caregiver level. But we do, we have nurse oversight. We have a director of nursing and we’re joint commission accredited, which is like the accreditation that the high end hospitals get to assure that you’re following certain standards and protocols.

We are. Probably on the price, your end of the options in our industry. The hard part is that if it gets to be too little of care, then a lot of companies won’t do it because there’s such a demand for care. Not enough caregivers.

So we’re really trying to utilize the caregivers first of all, it makes sense for us, but also with the clients who really need it. And all like all businesses now are just struggling to find halfway decent people. Cause S are so high and. Nobody wants to do this type of hard work

Yeah so amazingly we have incredible people who like, they’re just phenomenal human beings and this is what they wanna do, but of course they have to make a living. We wanna make sure that we are one of the best employers they can find. And so in order to do that, we have to pay them competitively on the higher end and provide really great benefit.

Which means the clients are gonna pay for it. But that said there’s still tremendous demand. So I would say the sweet spot where most companies are looking at is at least six hours. Let’s say at least 30 hours a week, I would guess is probably. What most companies would be willing to look at right now.

Which is makes sense for a lot of people listing I guess I can go over and help mom and dad one or two days a week. , after I’ve done my job, right? No, it’s hard balancing all the things. So I think a lot of people if it’s, basic level they’re looking for, Wake up time, bedtime or lunchtime are the hot button needs, right? Hey, can you come help get mom dressed and ready for the day? Make sure she takes a shower or, eat something. Cause sometimes elderly people are, will forget to eat. Remind her to take her medications that sort of thing, or get ready for bed.

So yeah, those are definitely the high demand times those transition times and I imagine like people come to you and they may not, this is, it was a new idea for me. I imagine mostly for coming into this and a new person in our home. It’s something new for mom and dad, and then they get more comfortable with it over the time I.

Yeah, definitely. It’s your turf. I think, especially with, excuse me, Asian families, we have this built in hospitality. If you’re in my home, I have to take care of you. And so we experience this even with my own. Mother-in-law when my father-in-law passed. He had lung cancer and we got to experience this from the client perspective. And he, she was really struggling and we’re like, Hey, we have this company, we own and we’ll, provide it for free. she didn’t want it. She was like, what am I gonna feed them for lunch? And I said, you don’t have to do anything for them.

They’re here really to support you. It was really hard convincing her, like eventually we did, but she really should have accepted our help much sooner. And there are tips and tricks that we give to other families, but she’s particularly Persistent in . Yeah. In want that wouldn’t happen with us.

It’s don’t forget to pick out the takeout on your way yet. Yeah. Definitely some generational things and cultural things. But it can be really hard to just. Admit your vulnerability and that you’re at that place. Or, there’s a whole, all the psychology around it, like guilt.

Like I should be the one doing it, that, that sort of thing. And this isn’t really in your, guys’ like part of your guys’ job description, but you must see people go through this quite a bit. What is some of your general pieces advice for. Maybe somebody who is letting mom and dad do their own thing, but now you have to step in right.

And get more involved. Yeah. And we actually see a real uptick in request for care after the holidays. Cuz a lot of in Hawaii, a lot of the adult children will go to the mainland and have their career and they’ll come home and visit and then they’ll. How much things have deteriorated with their parents.

And so that’s a time where they’re really observing new needs and danger issues. Maybe moms forgetting to turn off this stove, or there may be some incontinence where they’re, having accidents and that kind of thing. So I think some things to those are things to look for.

And just be when you’re with them, just be observant, be aware. I would say when you’re in the home, really I think I shared with you earlier offline, how high of a risk falls are for elderly people. When you’re young falling is no big deal. You fall, you get up, no harm, no foul, but for a senior citizen, it can really take someone who seems really vibrant and healthy and independent and put them in a really catastrophic place.

Even, a lot of people die after a fall, once they’re over 65. So fall prevention I think is really critical, even if you’re not at the point. Needing care. Just really observing the home look for, are there trip, hazards, rugs that, or if there’s a lot of clutter, a lot of elderly people start to hoard and put boxes in the way, and you really wanna make sure that those kind of things are put away as much as possible.

Grab bars, make sure there’s good lighting. That kind of thing. So I guess another side business we can get involved in is like getting a set of contractors to like rehab these houses with the right showers or the right. And yeah, I think that’s huge. And actually to do it even before it’s even a concern it’s that’s the trend, it’s the tsunami, right?

The silver tsunami. As what they’re calling the boomers who are aging. So I think those can definitely add value to a home. Other like resources for folks that, if they’re going through this we’ll probably refer people to this episode in the future. Because I’ll probably forget about this in six months about myself.

Yeah, I think, a R P. Which I always crack up cuz I’m now I’m a member they have some good resources and then, I think Hawaii has the elderly affairs. Division, which I know sounds like the elderly dating site, but it’s not, sounds like a dating site to me. we can make that our other side business.

Yeah. But we have a lot of side businesses, entrepreneurs . And yeah, there are a lot of, I think just a lot of resources That are available to people, even if they’re not at this level where they need actual in-home care, there’s, meals, all wheels and family and friends and volunteers through other through church or other programs.

So there are a lot of resources out there. The great thing is we’re in the age of Google and can just do a quick search. And I would say that’s where, that’s where our group is pretty valuable. There are a lot of resources, but which one, what, depending on where you are in the net worth spectrum, it’s different advice for different folks.

Yeah, right? Yeah. Allison’s kind of a high roller like myself. So we like fancy restaurants and. We also like these types of elderly healthcare options, but , maybe to close things out, like if you had to plan something for yourself or your, instructions for your kids, what would you just personally like to see for yourself?

And what are their reasons, based on what you, where you’re at. Obviously you’re a little bias, but like at what point would you phase it in and, based on what you. What would you eat from your menu? What I’m hoping to do is die relatively quickly.

oh, other than that, I think we all thought to happen, like I’ll take it up to 60, 65 at peak health and then just. Just go, yeah, like maybe work. If you had to live for an extended period of time after that peak of health, what would you do if I had to live? And I, if I had the resources, I would a hundred percent use my own services because I love my house

I’ve built it in a way that feels comfortable for me. I’m relatively social, but I definitely things on my own terms. So for me, a facility dictating when I eat or people just coming in I don’t know, it just doesn’t appeal to me at all. I would absolutely, if I can afford it, use my own services.

I don’t drive public transportation, so but what do you do if you wanna go somewhere, can the caregiver take you to somewhere, take you to Safeway or Costco or you want, is that part of the we have one client who our caregiver would take her golfing. Even though her skills have diminished greatly, like that was a big part of her life and her identity.

And so she would take her golfing and And now I think they’ve moved past that, but they go in Hawaii we say Hola holo, which means just go cruise, drive all over. So her shifts are basically they drive in the client’s car. She drives all over the island. They’ll go check out the beach, pick up a lunch.

Hang out. And like I said, the care is very much personalized, customized. It’s not that you, we say age in place and home. It doesn’t mean you have to sit at home all day. You can definitely, go walk the mall or go to church if that’s what they wanna do. And then other people who don’t wanna go anywhere, we also can we help coordinate our team will help coordinate Safeway deliveries or that kind of thing.

You also get a friend too for free. Yeah. Not a free friend, but not a free friend. Nothing is free in this life. The caregivers they learn from each other. It’s really a beautiful thing. We have very interesting clients. So the caregivers can learn a lot from them and the clients love having someone interested to talk to.

Any other for people going through this, gonna shut out a whole bunch of money for, any other like last words or wisdoms from your point of view, other than good luck, you’re the bottle loop?

I’ve wrote down my lessons learned since we’ve been doing this business things I’ve observed. I’m sure your listeners followers already hear this a lot, but be grateful. Every day for every day have people in your life that you love and who love you and make sure you communicate to that to them, because we do have some very rich people who don’t have anyone.

And it’s really sad. So they’re receiving top quality care, but are the kids of those kind of people involved? Did they have just find you guys on their own or? Some of them never had kids. They had like one of ’em found us on his own. And his wife was here when that happened, but she passed.

And so he’s now alone and and not super like happy. Not close to family and the other thing is when you’re super wealthy, you don’t know who’s your true friend, right? Yeah. Cause a lot of people are coming, knocking on the door, trying to be your friend. Know who your friends are.

Be nice to them. Show them love. Be respectful to your caregivers if you ever have, ’em tell your parents, if you do get, if they get caregivers to be respectful to them. And of course not, if they’re, if the caregivers neglectful are abusive, then you would wanna report it. But we definitely have clients that are harder for us to staff because the caregivers keep refusing to go.

And really you don’t want caregivers who don’t wanna be there. Like what kind of, it’s really hard to provide care for you if you’re nasty and so as long as it’s in your control be mindful of that. Don’t be one of those rich jerks who treat people. I wonder if there’s a difference between the Medicare, Medicaid, the option, like the, some people do the, they drain their finances.

and they wanna be broke. So the government pays for their end of day care. It can be a happy place in there. Like I’m sure the caregivers are just strung out. I don’t know. I can’t speak to that. I probably should learn more. It’s not my area of expertise, but I think there are caregivers who are genuinely, whether regardless of the paved source, there are caregivers.

I think anyone who goes into being a caregiver for the most part, you don’t go into it for money. So they’re genuinely fueled by caring for others. But also they tend to have a need for validation and acknowledgement and gratitude. So when you’re caring for someone day after day, who’s just nasty and ungrateful.

Yeah. It can be really hard. Whereas there are some like really phenomenal caregivers who thrive on see that as a challenge. Let me see if I can turn this person around. Like really they’re very empathetic and can really. Really be patient and have that thick skin and build that relationship to where it’s a beautiful thing.

And that is something special but not all of ’em. Aren’t gonna be going holo, holo and driving each other around in the car. No, no lunch together. no, there’s a lot of, and some, and everything’s customized. So there are some people who really want that chatterbox caregiver to talk to.

And other people are like, don’t talk to me, I wanna pretend you’re not here. Leave me alone. I’m gonna live my life and then you come help me when I need you. And that’s okay too. And that’s where you guys come into, you start matching up personalities and a little bit of that. Yeah. So when somebody’s interested and we have care, potential caregivers available, then we’ll go out.

We call it a living room visit. So we have our client experience manager and our. Go into the home to observe the environment and look for those fall hazards that I shared earlier and really get to know the patient and the family and see where the pain points are and how we can help ease, burdens, and make, bring a little joy back into life.

Make things better. And that’s where we come up together with the family. We came up with a customized care plan. What is your budget? What, where are we gonna maximize what we’re doing for you? And then the personality matchup is the second round then yeah. So honestly right now with the shortage of caregivers, it’s do we even have anyone in the first place, but we definitely, and this is the sales thing.

yeah, no, I’m just joking. No, I wanna be fully transparent. That’s sad. Like we do guarantee compatibility. So if it’s not a good fit our client experience manager’s job and we also. An employee experience manager. So they’re checking in with the employee and the client. Hey, how did things go on your shift?

What can we do better? What changes do we need? And so we will keep looking if we need to find someone who’s a good personality match. Yeah, no it’s definitely in demand. That’s for sure. So you think about it as, this is a pretty good business you got going on here.

But yeah, yeah, thanks for jumping on the podcast. I think it applies to our Hawaii clans as well as on the mainland. I’m sure there’s options similar to this, not just going to the local high end care home, and hopefully they have lube for you again, but there’s other options out there.

Allison, you wanna get your contact information out there? If people have any questions? They can reach out. That’d be great. So if anyone has questions, the best thing to do is call our main line (808) 447-7448. Or shoot an email to Honolulu@brightstarcare.com.

All right thanks Allison for jumping on. If you guys have any questions about this we’ll probably make an info page about this type. Information at some point, nothing is coming to me, probably simplepassivecashflow.com/ elder. Something like that. I don’t know, email the team. If you guys are listening to this in the future, we’ll point you in the right direction, but definitely one of those topics that not a lot of people talk about, but it is a huge source of expenses in the future and something to plan.

If you guys heard it, it can cost upwards of 20 grand a month. And it ain’t going, getting cheaper. It’s getting 10% every single year, apparently. So something to think about folks but hopefully we didn’t make everybody be depressed by this today. we’ll see you guys next time. Bye. Thanks Lane.

November 2022 Monthly Market Update

 Here we go. It’s the November 2022 monthly market update. The year is almost over. Interest rates are being jacked up even more to curb inflation. But what are the other stories coming up? Welcome everybody. This is the monthly market update. Here we go. All right. If you are new to these monthly updates.

You guys can check them out at simplepassivecashflow.com/investor letter. You’ll find this in all the other monthly reports. We do this every month. If you guys are new to the group, also check out the I think we’ve got like a hundred reviews on this thing thus far. My first book, The Journey to Simple Passive Cashflow teaches all about taxes, investing in deals, and infinite banking.

A lot of the stuff that I didn’t realize was. Very counterintuitive ways of building wealth that we use for a lot of our clients in the family office group and our investor group. But let’s get started here for you folks. And for some of you guys joining live on some of the social media channels of the Facebook groups and LinkedIn.

And those of you guys who are also checking this out on the podcast form can also check these great graphs and visuals we have on each of these articles. on the YouTube channel. But the first thing coming from John Burns real estate consultant is that apartment rent doesn’t grow to the sky. And I think we all knew that’s why, we never really underwrote more than a 3% rent escalator.

Whenever I see that in a deal, I know that they’re reaching or maybe that they need to inflate the performance a little. And that’s what we teach in this syndication e-course. As a past investor, what are the kinds of things to be on the lookout for? So in this article saying the rents are set to fall in many areas around the country, which is exactly what the Fed needs to help get inflation under control.

So like a lot of places, like we are investing in Phoenix, some of those rent girls were like 20% or greater year. And you know that definitely that’s not sustainable. I would say more on a five to 10 year time horizon. I think Phoenix is more like a two to 3% annual rent growth, or at least that’s what you should underwrite so that you under promise, over deliver.

The combination of recession concerns, requests to return, the office rents that are just too high and a multifamily high of new rental supply are all combining to cause rents to soften. Potentially decline and of course, take all these articles with a grain of salt. And I try and interject my commentary on top of this because, this is national data here, we always try and look at the emerging markets and within emerging markets such as like a, Dallas or Phoenix, you’ve got your submarkets there may be a couple dozen submarkets within one of those major Ms.

But what led to this great growth? Strong job growth, income growth, household formation, bolster demand in nearly every market, even with those with elevated levels of supply move outs to purchase a home or at all times, lows. And are likely to stay low given the relative affordability of apartments at 6% plus market rates.

So what they’re saying is, a lot of the people who were on the fence to buy houses up until maybe a quarter or two ago, they got the wind knocked out of ’em with the interest rates exploding on them. Now they cannot afford that much in terms of monthly payments. Which is why a lot of those people are moving back to apartment dwellings, nicer ones of.

but they’re taking a step back from home Ownership rent to income ratios of 20 to 23% are completely normal within ranges and a testament to the strong growth in incomes among new renters that REITs have observed over the last several quarters. So they get, I think what they’re saying is, people’s pay, their salaries are there too.

The higher rents. Of course we always ask like, how much more can it be going up? Really it’s not getting to that, that one third, rent to income ratio quite yet. We’re still in like that 20% range of business online. Here they’re talking about what were the things put in that, that latest inflation reduction act.

It always seems like they come up with one of these things once or twice a. This one got signed in on August 16th, 2022. And the way it normally works with these is, they sign it in and then, they’re investors and, a lot of the sophisticated investors start picking through it and start to see any carrots or sticks in there.

So some of the tax credits and incentives promoting clean energy in. One of the sole purposes is to incentivize and revitalized domestic manufacturing and many of its tax credits and incentives are focused on clean energy manufacturing. Now, I don’t know how that really impacts any of you listeners out there seems obvious that would be, that where money would go.

Obviously, this is the whole joke about this, right? What the heck does that have to do with inflation reduction act, if anything, that just is more spending, which increases inflation, but any. . We don’t like to get political on this show because it is a waste of time, right?

We need to figure out as investors what is happening here and how can we react for our own good. So one of the things of this inflation reduction Act is the advanced. Project tax credit provision credits up to 30% of the investment in PR in property used in a qualifying advanced energy project.

That one’s a kind of a head scratcher on how to really use that one. I’ll be honest one of the significant drawbacks in the Investment reduction Act is enactment of a corporate minimum book tax. The minimum book tax would be 15% of book. and lastly, as a condition for being subject to the corporate minimum book tax for a year, that the, a coal corporation must have an average book income of excess of 1 billion over three years prior to the tax year.

So it really probably doesn’t impact many of our listeners. I don’t know if any of you guys make a billion dollars. If not shoot me an email. Let’s get you into some deals or especially some of these benefit deals we have coming up. As it’s harder to find deals out there and we’ve taken a break from the normal value ad apartments because it’s not the time to be going into those deals, but these high interest rates.

So I’ve personally been looking at ways to save taxes, right? It’s getting time to be efficient, so to find, seek deals that provide those tax minutes for our investors. So we’ve got some things coming down the pipe for you guys, if you guys are interested in those. If you’re not part of our investor group, go to simple passive cash flow.com/club and get educated and see what’s coming down the pipeline there.

For multi-housing news the article headline is the fed’s painful ounce of prevention worth a pound of cure. And obviously what they’re talking about is curbing inflation, which, they pegged at 8%. The Fed’s funds rate Feds have increased the cost of doing business across every sector of the economy.

This also impacts the US and abroad. The economy this time around is more on secure footing than 2008 excess. Access is where we saw in residential real estate and construction that drove the economy in places like Phoenix, Vegas, Florida, and California in 2008 are not the norm today. And said, we’re still seeing everything from manufacturing and entertainment and technology and healthcare drive our economy today.

And I will also personally add that, we don’t have these no doc, these ninjas that they gave anybody with a pulse. To invest. And I mind you, investors like the, I think the reason that sets us apart from the average investor out there is that we try to invest in things that cash flow and are backed by equity even in hard times.

And I think at the end of the day, you, if you go into things that cash flow, you should be a lot better than most or be able to weather a lot longer recession or maybe even depression, if that will. To be able to come out the other end and hold onto your asset. Hold on to your debt service, whether you do that with cash flow or cash reserves, one or the two or the combination of both.

I know I’m going through this very quickly, but these are very simple yet, these concepts are, have taken me a long time to realize and really think of and how do I strategize my own the whole balance between trying to grow your money. How much cash reserves do you have on ti on, on.

But if you need to invest, like how we are now with, inflation at very high levels where you’re just losing your money, not doing anything, where can you make it and get a nice little yield, maybe low double digits and yet be very secure in investment and not have it be a high risk type of move.

That is the question. That’s what we’re all asking. I’ve obviously got my opinions and I will be sharing those, especially with you guys coming on the January retreat on January 13th to the 16th here in Hawaii. Beyond the lookout for that. Again, club members you guys get invites to that. Freddie Mac reports multi-family investment market index down in the second quarter.

Decrease nationally in all 25 markets on both accorded annual bases. It is similar to the last article, right? Things couldn’t grow at a 8%, 20% rent increased level for very long. And at what point that rents are still going up, but not at that feverish pace as it once was, but it’s not really going down yet.

That’s a. And I don’t really anticipate it going down. And I said this before, if there’s if I was a gambling man, the one thing I would bet on is rent’s not really going down for a long period of time.

And again, different source. Here, there’s seen primary driver between the quarterly decline was higher mortgage rates.

And Aln. Also was saying the same thing. Quarter three brought an end to coasting on 2021. What they found made demand rent growth. Finally, losing steam was a major development in third quarter, but net absorption deserves all the attention has been getting. As mentioned, apartment men has been poor.

All year at mid-year 2022, net absorption was 75% lower than it was in 2021. So what that means, what absorption is new units getting filled in a timely matter, like a days on market. It’s, I would say overall, occupancy is pretty high and, there is a housing shortage and especially with people not being able to afford houses, that’s where the apartment demand is still pretty. For both average asking rents and average effective rent. Third quarter growth was a loss by any quarter since 2021, quarter one. For a price class perspective, average effective growth, rent growth was stronger in the quarter for price classes, A and B, with the other two price classes also seeing larger declines in rent growth.

So what they’re saying, again we’ve talked about this in. Your higher end tenants with, they call ’em class A and B here are less impacted and going through less declines than the Class C or below cohorts. And that makes a lot of sense because this last pandemic really hurt the low end as opposed to the high end.

But I think a lot of it is and don’t get it, don’t get it mixed up with these. Fear mongering headlines. The industry came into a year with a very high average occupancy, very low lease concession availability and double digit 2021 rent growth, thanks to the demand explosion, the from the previous year, and the fact that we had a freaking pandemic in 2020, right?

The high average occupancy provided upward pressure for rents, even as lack, lesser demand was slowly eating away at surplus occupancy. Very low apartment demand degraded further even falling into very slight negative territory nationally in the period. But ultimately lack of household creation and affordability is the cause of this.

The fourth quarter is usually the softest for multifamily demand, and the largest macro economic situations does not prove much reason to expect this year to be an exception. And I would say maybe on 10% of our assets, we are taking a very conservative approach because we’re starting to see some of the signs of normally like we start to see a slowdown in leasing activity.

We’re about Thanksgiving, but we’ve really started to see that here in October. So we might be reading it. Into a lot, but that’s your guys’ antidote from what we’re seeing across the portfolio. But top five markets from multifamily deliveries, and this is where the pros, the big money, is putting money into building new assets due to long term the fundamental growth.

And I, again, as a real estate investor, I think you need to be looking not on a 1, 2, 3 year time horizon, but like a 5, 10, 20. Or more time horizon. Those markets are Dallas, Houston, Washington dc Miami and Phoenix.

Multi-Housing News came up with this great article that I wanted to pull out, why Affordable Housing Production Lakes Demand. We’ve always, everything that’s built is always class a brand new, right? Some of the reason here, housing aimed at people with low to moderate income is not being replaced at a fast enough pace to meet our demand.

Of the nation’s 43 million multifamily units, roughly 10% are considered affordable for those whose incomes are less. 80% of the area median. So this is what we’ve called the missing middle, or I would just call it the lower middle class and workforce.

They’re talking here about the l i htc I call the LTA Lurk program, with, low income requirements for, as part of the building. We try to stay away from this in our investments. It’s just a different little bit different type of a business plan. If you’re that kind of investor, you don’t knock yourself out, right?

You guys that your money. But we found that, whenever we have more than 10% section eight, it gets to be a little bit seedier of a property, although like the LTA and the lurk and depending what municipality you’re. , it’s more, it’s nicer pro assets typically of what I’ll see and they’ll pay get if the average rents are like one 1500, they may require like 20% of the units to rent at 1300.

We’ve got a couple of the buildings like that, and they’re nicer pro properties, so you don’t really attract the CD tenants. But, I really would stay away from that on Class Bs or worse. They’re saying that, Missing middle housing is much more problematic. Very low New construction is coming online.

One reason is rising construction costs, but all require new projects to be more expensive Class A properties. Another factor is regulate regulatory barriers, especially in small markets where there are no clear rules when it comes to zoning issues. I will also. Cause we were always looking for land and we actually just dropped the project in Alabama that we were looking at.

The, some of the costs were just too high. So there you go. Some of the, that’s a real life example of what they’re just talking about with rising construction costs.

Adams reports. US foreclosure activity continu to increase quarterly nearing pre pandemic levels. Definitely nothing near what it was in 2008. I’ll probably call it one or less than a 10th of where it was, but it is picking up from the low of 2020. 1% from the previous quarter and up 167% from a year ago.

But that number is, yeah, this is a great example of fear mongering right here. They’re saying it’s up hundred 67% from a year ago, from a year ago it was pretty much nothing. And it is nothing compared to what it, I would say average it is foreclosure activity is reflecting other aspects of the economy as unemployment rates continue to be historic.

the mortgage delinquency rates are lower than it was before the Covid 19 rate outbreak. And this is what’s the Fed is looking at. Or this is a byproduct of unemployment, which is something that the Fed is looking at. The Fed needs to induce a little bit of unemployment right now. Again, unemployment rates continue to be historically low, so they need to induce more unemployment so that they can get this inflation under.

It’s under control, to get it down to, I think what we’re used to under 6%, I think I made a bet last month with Dean from when we do the Real Estate Brothers for the Hawaii investors, I think I said it was gonna go up to 10% for a 30 year mortgage and then come back down maybe a year from now, or 18 months from now.

Which is why, we’re switching the acquisition strategy. A little bit states that pulls the greatest number of foreclosures, including California, Florida, Texas, Illinois, New York. And some of that’s misleading, some of those, like California, duh. Because they’re like a huge state with a big population.

So its Florida. I’d like to know more percentage per capita, maybe or per person. I think that’s a little bit more. Then just going after the Biggers bigger states.

Last fact here, in fact, nearly three times more homes were repossessed by lenders in the second quarter of 2019 than in the second quarter of 2020. We believe that this may be an indication that borrowers are leveraging their equity and selling their homes rather than risking the loss of their equity in a foreclosure auction.

I would disagree with that. Common. I think right now the foreclosures is really low. I think really all that is that, that’s basically just shit happens. I don’t know if it’s really indicative what’s happening in the economy, but it’s just, sometimes people go, Troubling times personally, or this, they, they get into a car accident, somebody gets hurt or somebody just loses their job.

I think that’s just the, exceptions coming from, people who just go through tough times in life. And that’s always going to be there. They call it the death, despair, destruction, divorce disaster. That’s what, like those wholesalers prey on right? People, other people’s misfortune, which I don’t really think is very ethical.

I don’t know. I’m not gonna say it’s ethical or not, but it’s jacked up if you if you think my opinion. And that’s always been tick me off that, these guys will go around they’re here to help people solve their problems and buy people’s houses for 50 grand where they really could just sell it to a realtor for 90 and.

They say they’re doing a good thing. I see it as screwing somebody who isn’t the most financially minded or in a stressful distress situation. That said, we don’t have any problem doing it when it’s a rich apartment investor who is just a little clumsy with their money or worse, second generation, third gen generation wealth person who doesn’t know too much about money and is just looking to get paid quick and selected at a good price.

but maybe, I’d say maybe next year, if this all continues and interest rates go up and some of these adjusted adjustable rate mortgages continue to increase the debt service amounts, maybe some of these apartment investor owners might be more distressed sellers ready to sell, at which case might be, we might get involved in some of those acquisitions musicians.

A lot of those people, maybe they just don’t have adequate cash reserves to, whether that’s storm or, some of our cases, like general partners will put in some of our money and that’s why we are here. Because I think I, I will agree with Sam Zel here. He says the US economy is softening, not in a recess.

I says we’re not in our recession yet. We’re in a market softening in inflation reduction. Act pass in August resulted in a lot of spending and is irresponsible, and the title of the act is misleading and it’s going to add on the inflation pressure and not decrease it. Yeah. He’s probably right.

He’s probably right there. Real page. Apartments remain hot, but peak rent growth could be in rear view. I would probably agree that they’re, these guys are spot on with this.

Some of the highest comparison to the 2022 peak in this order. West Palm Beach, Florida, Phoenix, Arizona, Jacksonville, Florida, New York. New York. Fort Lauderdale, Las Vegas, Memphis, Riverside, California, San Francisco, California, Miami, Florida. They’re all. And you were from six to 2% off of their previous high.

Still, if you definitely jump, they jumped, but it’s still up overall.

So these are the top cities where housing markets are cooling the fastest. You don’t wanna be in these markets, I guess is what they’re saying. Or maybe it’s just they, these markets really got really hot and there was just a big delta, what we were saying on the last slide. But number one, Seattle, then two Las Vegas, three San Jose, California, San Diego, Sacramento.

Denver. Then Phoenix, Oakland, Northport, Florida. I’m by a little biased cuz I invest in. I think Phoenix is on here just because Phoenix was like the hottest market in the whole country. So I think that’s what’s contributing to their big Delta. I still think it’s a great place to be, but yeah, like Seattle, Las Vegas, San Jose, those things really spiked and cooling down now.

And this is more for home cells, has nothing, not talking about.

Affordable housing trends Report affordability has emerged as a primary concern for low income earners living in naturally occurring affordable housing apartment asking rent peaked at 16.9% between mid 2021 and compared to an increase at 2.3% in the average already wages over the same period, so people’s pay is not going up.

Their rent is financing gaps widen as construction costs soar. We talked about this earlier with construction costs going up. We just finished our Chase Creek construction 230 units where I would say we probably got hit the hardest with this, with the lumber, I think a year and a half ago.

Our lumber budget exploded, three x outside of our control, but it is what it is. We recovered, moved on and got over it. Substantial progress remains elusive, modest increases, and we’re talking about the Affordable Housing Trends report. So this is where a lot of the federally subsidized rental units by program.

From the most to least is the housing choice vouchers. Then a project or section eight, then public housing and then another.

Si joint Center for Housing studies of Harvard University reporting, leading indicator of remodeling activity. Okay, so as we know in 2020 the remodeling took a big peak there. And then, maybe cuz people were stuck at home and their homes were important because that was the only place they could go.

But they’re saying annual gains in improvement and maintenance. Expanders to owner occupied homes are expected to climb sharply by the middle of next year. So maybe this will help lower some of the raw material costs like lumber.

How rising mortgage rates are pushing people back into the rental market. We talked about that earlier. Here it is in a different format. The tightness you said was created by a decorative underbuilding followed by the global financial crisis in 2008, which occurred when millennials were coming of age forming households and creating a surge in housing.

It’ll take a while before you see a substantial improvement in rent affordability. But a supply increase should eventually boost rental vacancy and decrease pressure on rents. But that’s not coming anytime soon. And this is why I still believe residential multifamily is still the place to be with this fundamental shortage or more demand than supply.

Here, Rob Page reports higher income, renters pay the biggest rent hikes and are least likely to miss a rent payment. That’s because the high income earners, or we call ’em here, market rate, class A people have more liquidity, more savings as opposed to the Class C staff where, you know, I would probably assume that a lot of those guys have either no savings or maybe a thousand or a couple thousand bucks.

When there are uncertain times or a pandemic, those are the people that kind of need that government assistance first, where it’s the wealthier people who have liquidity and savings. And I think that’s what’s hard right now is there is a lot of liquidity still in the system, which is why with the interest rates being cranked up, you’re not seeing the inflation.

go down the next month or the next quarter, right? That’s what’s the problem right now. There’s a lot of quitting in the system, which creates a lot of SL and slack from the Fed, increasing interest rates and that the unemployment doesn’t pop up and doesn’t lower inflation right away. There’s that leg.

Here they’re saying the average renter in class A and B units have seen rent increases 14 to 15% since. Of 2020, which is maybe it was called that three years ago. So about 5% a year, which is pretty high. Again, that’s where we get that two to 3% is what I would normally underwrite. Or, somebody could probably truthfully say it’s 5% but I just probably wouldn’t use that just to be safe, unless you’re somebody who likes to just promise the moon and not.

Wanna make excuses when you don’t hit your targets later. If you’re using the right numbers, then it is what it is, right? Things happen, but, I think something can be said for fudging those numbers and then, when you don’t hit ’em well, it’s yeah, obviously it wasn’t, The rents weren’t gonna go up 5% every single year.

Different story with Class C renters, of course. These are more workforce housing. Folks of average WA range lower than $62,000 a year. Their rents probably went up about 10%, so maybe 3% across the board or 3% per year over the last few years.

But that’s it. That’s the end of this month’s report. We will see you guys in December. If you guys haven’t joined our club, go to simple passive cash flow.com/club. We’ve got the annual retreat from January 13th to the 16th in Honolulu, Hawaii. You guys have to complete the form there and book an onboarding call so we can get to know you because everybody who comes to our retreat, we’ve met, we’ve vetted, we know that they are going to make a great community member there.

Not gonna be a weirdo in Hawaii. We don’t want any weirdos in Hawaii and it is what it is. It’s like we have a private life. Group. We don’t just let anybody in and we especially don’t let anybody come to the physical in-person events because it reflects badly on me, right? , It’s like people think that I know these people super well and a lot of people I would say maybe it was a little bit different than the pandemic, now that we’re out of the pandemic, I would say people who come, I typically met at least half of the folks out there, but it’s always great to.

Associate the face to the name and it gives you guys the opportunity to ask the real questions that you want, right? I’ll put, I’ll remind you guys, whoever’s coming what do you guys need? What can I do to help you? Let’s talk about your situation, right? Let’s not talk about the weather here in Hawaii.

That’s boring, right? That’s not a good use of our time. Anything I can do to help. And that’s what you guys get when you guys come out to Hawaii here in January. Again, join the club, simplepassivecashflow.com/club, and I enjoy the Thanksgiving holidays and we will see you guys in December.

Live for Free | House Hacking With Andrew Kerr

What’s up folks, we’re gonna be talking a little bit about house hacking. Now house hacking might be for the younger guys, in my opinion. Great way to get started when you’re low on capital. Most of you guys out there have spouses. That’ll probably kill you if you even consider having somebody else live in the house with you guys.

Maybe not the best idea for people who want to stay married or above the age of 30. But, maybe if you guys have kids, this might be a great option to reach out to them. Or, maybe if you’ve got kids in college, maybe your kids can house hack it. And this is a great way to collect rent and see how money really is made as opposed to trading time at your W2 day job.

But before we get going, somebody asks a question there, people send me emails all the time and they say, “ Hey, I found this investment making 13%, 15% a year. And I just glanced at it and not all investments are made the same. And the first question that most sophisticated investors ask, including myself is like, what’s this investment backed off of, of course. Beyond performers can mean anything, but this is more like, all right, say an investment performer is. It’s not just some kind of crazy Bitcoin mining machine based on the price of Bitcoin. Where if Bitcoin tanks, so does your investment because it’s based on that, but let’s just say it’s like a legit investment that, there’s a sound P and L and supposedly you’re gonna get 14, 15% off.

The next thing is what do you collateralize? By what are you backed by as what we talk about? When sophisticated investors talk and, sometimes, you’ll see these investments and, there’s kind of one making that reigns through the internet.

Is that you’re investing in these businesses or providing startup capital, but, again, answering that. Butterfly money collateralized by there’s not by much. And which is why it’s a risky investment. And which is why it’s a higher rate of return, or it commands that because it’s more risky.

And this is, I think, where a lot of newer investors chase the higher returns. Ooh, 15%, Ooh, 18%. And they just gravitate towards that, but they just don’t stop to think and ask this question and they realize if things go bad, if shit hits the fan what are they gonna go and collect?

On the right. The nice thing about real estate is the real estate is there and it typically doesn’t go up and down in value. And if it does go down in value, just hold and wait till the better time for the sale, an operational business, like the one I’m referring to here that has like this higher rate of return.

In bad times or, if you ever needed to recollect on the asset’s not worth very much some of these businesses, there’s no real physical inventory. And even if you, there was some inventory in some warehouse somewhere, good luck. Even collecting pennies on the dollar on that.

That’s just another view to look at these types of investments and at least spotting out the bad ones. Another thing that I see going around a lot, especially in the house flipper world, is that there are pretty a lot of good house flippers. Once they do it for several years, they realize house flipping really doesn’t make that much money and it’s super risky.

So what do they like to do? They like to become a marketer, use their social media influence, and that’s why you see all these silly house flippers on social media, all the. Creating this brand. And what they’re essentially doing is they’re taking the unsuspecting passive investors and putting them in a newer house slippers deal and making money on the spread.

So what this kind of more experienced house slipper is doing is they’re pawning off. Somebody else’s deal as they’re up. Some newer flipper who’s really inexperienced, a huge risk. They, their fair market rent for private money might be in the 20% range. Sounds crazy, but it’s also very crazy to be investing in a newer flipper.

It’s, very bad paper. If you wanna use that industry. So what this kind of this middle man will do is they’ll pay, they’ll charge 20% to that newer flipper. And then they’ll give the passive investor 12 to 15% and obviously pocket the spread in the middle. And yeah, I think this is there’s some bid of a cloaking of this a lot of times, and a lot of times just the past investor really doesn’t have the experience to ask the question who the heck is the operator?

And this obviously happens in the syndication world, too, right? Where you have these kind of Daisy chain deals put together. And there’s everybody in their mother raising capital, which, in my opinion, is illegal. because, you need to be a licensed broker dealer to be able to do that.

You need to be an operator and not just a capital razor for that deal, but, I think that’s where there’s all sorts of things out there going on and, potentially nefarious activity and it’s hard for passive investors. And that’s why we always tell you guys, build a network, get going building your inner circle.

And that’s what we provide in the family office. Oana mastermind. There’s well over 90 members in that group right now. We asked you guys to test drive our organization, see if it’s the right fit for you. I really don’t think that there’s anything else better out there with this much sophisticated, accredited passive investors, right?

We’re not some real estate groupy group trying to teach you how to fake it to you, make it and make it rich. Cuz quite honestly, a lot of those groups. The failure rate is like 95, 90 7%. It’s and that’s why I never wanted to create a group like that. I wanted to create a group for folks like myself who are still working their jobs, still running busy entrepreneur businesses.

And how do you be the best pass investor on the side? And my whole formula was for that is relationships and really banding together with a bunch of other purely passive investors and trading the best trade secrets, where to invest who to stay away from, and then ultimately building those relationships with the people. If you guys are interested in that, check out simplepassivecashflow.com/journey for more details and enjoy the show.

Hey, simple passive casual listeners. Today. We are gonna talk about house hacking and how you can implement that or do that alongside of your normal investing or do that as a primary form of investing our guest today is Andrew Kerr from fi by rei.com. So Let’s get into your story, cuz you’re pretty accomplished real estate investor been doing it a while. How maybe give us a little rundown of how you got to this point. I had actually was working in the mortgage banking industry. I skipped college, started right away at 19 working and by 20 I was doing well enough where I could buy my own home.

So at 20 I bought my own place and I did this sort of house hacking style room rental, where I bought a place running out the other rooms. So my roommates, my friends were essentially covering my cost of my mortgage and along the way I had built up. Decent size real estate portfolio. I ended 2016 with about 40 doors, 40 rental units spread out across a couple different states, but most of my investments were there in North Carolina where I grew up.

And then I had this progression in life where I wanted to change my lifestyle. And started selling off all my properties that I actively own and actively managed and started investing in passive income. So I started investing in larger syndications where all I had to do was manage the sponsor or the individual or the team that was running the, this syndication.

And that’s let me free up a lot of time to focus on passion projects, like working for nonprofits and travel. And I think a lot of people listen and they hear about your story and how you’re investing in bigger syndications. And obviously my story is sort very similar. I started in 2009 and our paths it looks like a mirror a little bit.

Yeah. And they’re like I’m gonna invest in syndications, it took a long time. For me, it took since 2009 and then 2015, getting up to 11 rentals. And when did you start again? Just to give some people, how long it. It’s it grows at a snail space, right?

Yeah. I really started going heavy in real estate there in 2010, 2011. I had, while I had bought my first house at 20 and I had owned that property for quite a while. I didn’t go heavy there until 2010. And that was partly because I went from. The mortgage industry, where I had a six figure income to working in the nonprofit industry, where I started as a volunteer with an $800 a month stipend to then $2,000 a month.

So I did it built up a real estate portfolio on a very minimum budget, very minimum salary. And. It takes you about six to 10 years to really change your life around with real estate, which in the grand scheme of things, when you look at it, if you’re gonna be 70, 80, 90, a hundred years old, focusing really hard for six to eight years, isn’t that long of a period of a time.

I know a bunch of investors they’ll do the short term rentals or the house hacking very similar variety, but at some point you had a turning point where you’re like, screw this is too much work. Was there any kind of particular thing you can remember back to, or was it a sort of a gradual thing of slowly transitioning into syndications?

Yeah, it was a bit of a gradual thing, I’m 37 now. So when I started going really into it, it. Late twenties. And at that time I had more time on my hands. I did not nonprofit work. I did hanging cabinets. I did floors. I did painting. I didn’t have capital. So I did a lot of the work myself and the two niches I focused on were.

College housing and affordable housing. And then as life progressed, you start to get into your thirties. You start to get serious relationships, you get engaged, you get married. And I just wanted to be more hands off. My college housing portfolio was always managed by someone else, my affordable housing I did until I just ended up selling it, but just life as transitioned, you wanna spend time on different things.

It is just this progression where I didn’t want to be involved on the day to day anymore. And that’s where I started as I sold off my portfolio, reinvesting it passively into syndications. If you could define house hacking for us and we’ll get into your little twist on house sacking, cuz I, I think when people hear it, it’s it can mean a lot of things, Yeah. So I really look at house hacking as just making a slightly different choice for your housing. All the way back to a lot of folks have read that rich dad, poor dad book that basically says your house is a liability, not an asset. So the idea is just to do the slight change on how you pick your housing, especially if you’re in a high cost of living area.

So you can reduce. That 30 to 40% of your budget. That’s on housing and cut that in half or completely reduce it. And then the idea with house hacking is I define it as these six styles of house hacking. There’s the room rental style house hacking where you buy a big house, you rent out the rooms.

That’s great when you’re just getting outta college and then. There’s the sort of live and flip where you’ll live in the house for a year or two while you’re renovated, and then you sell it. That’s a lot of work. It’s not great for a family. Then those couple other styles are this sort of income suite where you convert a basement or you have a mother-in-law suite.

You have an accessory dwelling unit, like a pool house that you can rent out or a garage apartment, you have this sort of small multifamily and then you have a work provided housing. And then the idea is with all those different styles, you can run out to long term tenants. You can run out to short term tenants like Airbnb, V R B O, or you can do midterm.

Sort of rentals where you rent to corporate housing or traveling nurses. And the idea is you pick the model that’s best for you and pick the type of tenant base that you want. And it lets you reduce your housing costs. My first two house hacks were that room rental style. My third and fourth house hack were this sort of more luxury house hack where we bought this small multi-family property and really created these high end apartments for it.

And I’m happy to dig in more to that style of house hacking if you want. Yeah. When you went, when you did that style the more higher end one was that a short term or long term, the way you did. Yeah, we did a little bit of both. So when we moved to new Orleans, about four years ago, we run in an apartment right away because we wanted to start for looking for real estate and to do a house hack.

And what we found was this old 1920s corner store property that was in really bad shape, had broken sewer lines, it needed new roof. It had knob and tube wiring. And what we did is we gutted it to the studs and we converted it to three high end apartments. And then out back was this barn building that we turned into a one car garage and a sort of carriage house guest house.

And what we do with that carriage house is we rent it out on Airbnb, V R B O. So like during Mardi Graw we get 200 bucks a night for this $500 square foot place. Then the main building. We live in the upstairs, which is a two bedroom, one bathroom apartment. And a lot of folks when they think of house hacking is you really gotta sacrifice on CRE creature comforts.

You can really do it really nice where, we’ve got the farmhouse sink, the stone countertop, the higher end kitchen cabinets with the crown molding. We have a jacuzzi tub in the bathroom, $20 square foot, marble floor in the bathroom, hardwood floors. And then downstairs, we have long term tenants, we got a one bedroom and then a two bedroom.

And the really basic idea of it is those downtown stairs tenants cover our mortgage and a little bit of the taxes and the insurance for the property. And then that short term rental Outback covers all our additional costs. And we usually make, five to 10 grand on the property as well. So not only do we have a really comfortable, nice, higher end place to live, but we also have zero housing costs and then usually are able to pocket some money off of it.

And that gives us a lot of freedom to do a lot of other things that we want in. And you’re taking advantage of it’s your primary home. So in terms of financing and were you doing like a FHA, like 3% down or, yeah, for this one, we actually used hard money because it needed so much work. We bought it for two 70 and it needed to be gut to the studs and we put in about 250,000 into renovating it.

So we used hard money. We got all the renovations done after about 11 months we moved in and then we refinanced out with the conventional loan and then we’re able to pull back out most of the cash we put into it with our equity line that we added on the property. We’re actually working on a new property, which is just a due duplex, which is gonna be a higher end house hack as well.

But like with that, we ended up doing a FHA loan cause we’re sitting on a bunch of cash, but we wanted to. Have that cash on hand to do the renovations and do the value, add expansion on this next property that we’re looking at. So there’s a lot of opportunities out there, but most people, if they’re short on cash will use that FHA loan to do a house hack, cuz you only have to put that three and a half percent down.

And the, you get a little bit better interest rate when you’re the when you actually live in that property, as opposed to a non-owner occupied property, I would say probably what a quarter point or a half a point better. Yeah. Usually about a half a point dependent on the bank. So it ends up being work, working out pretty well.

I know a lot of listeners they live in like California, where a lot of these higher price markets are, they’re priced out. They don’t hit the 1% rent value ratio. And for those people I’ll say, Hey, go outta state rent. Get above that 1% rent value ratio, but some people.

They have limitations and it is what it is. I say something is better than nothing. At least you get outta the stock market and all of those type of investments and house hacking is another option. Or maybe you can go over some strategies for folks who have been investing, but it more, it’s more of a lifestyle change too.

And part of it is with the house hack house. Doesn’t have to meet the conventional 1% role. If you wanna buy the property and have it be a long term rental, you should definitely have it meet those traditional real estate investing roles. But, we’ve worked with some folks that have done house hacks where, maybe you’re in that high cost of living area like California or Seattle or New York and your housing costs are.

Three grand a month. If you can do a house hack and just reduce your cost to 1500 a month, that can be life changing for a lot of folks. Maybe the property will never become a long term rental, but if you need a place to live for that next 5, 7, 10 years, and if you were cut and cut those housing costs in half, most people for $1,500 a month, that gets ’em a new car, that lets ’em travel.

If they want to travel that lets ’em pay down debt, for $1,500 a month in savings. You can max out a 401k at work. So even if you never want to be a big real estate investor, or you’re just trying to, or you wanna save money to invest in real estate, do a house hack in, in that higher cost of living area and reduce your housing costs that will frees up the cash that you can then put in other places.

So now maybe you’ll feel more comfortable investing that estate. Any other nuances about house hacking that after being doing it for a few years, You know the listener out there might, clean some insight over just anything random. Yeah. The biggest thing is that most people had this default of, if I’m doing a house hack I gotta become a giant real estate investor and that’s not true.

And then the other is most folks feel like, oh, house hacking is something you can only do in your twenties. And it’s where you’re gonna have all these giant roommates. And you can really. Quite the opposite of that, where while my wife and I have tenants living below us, we didn’t have to sacrifice on any creature comforts.

Where we live in new Orleans, we have the street car two and a half blocks from us. We have bars, restaurants, grocery store Walgreens, within four or five blocks walking distance, we’ve got original hardwood floors in the place, 11 and a half 12 foot ceilings. That’s this misconception a lot of folks have with house hacking is it has to be giving up and making a lot of sacrifices on location or space.

If you plan for it, you can really get everything you want. And that’s the obvious cons, right? You’re living near your tenants. Me personally, I’m an introvert and I that’s a big one for me. , that’s why I don’t do it. I actually house hacked my primary residence in Seattle for I put it on Airbnb and that was just tiring to have people come in and out.

I just rented like the bottom floor. So I’ve done it, but I know a lot of people there, they might be a little bit more outgoing and they might like to chat up people who are out of town. If that’s you this could be something that you wanna create your life around and.

I guess a captive audience for all your stories, if whatever you will, but maybe give people like insight in your life today. Like how are you using house hacking cuz you’re you’re definitely more on the fi side of things and just given an idea or another viewpoint of things you don’t hear talked about in the workplace cubic.

So back in 2016, I had from building up with those portfolios and selling off money and reinvesting, I got to where in that sort of P community folks call lean fire. So I achieved that towards the end of 2016, and now I’m working towards fad fire, but what house hacking lets us do is, You essentially have five big expenses.

You’ve got taxes, you’ve got healthcare, you’ve got your housing. You’ve got automobile and food and real estate through the depreciation and doing things like cost segmentation. I’ve essentially offset almost all of my income. I have a very minimal taxes. And then by eliminating my housing costs through house hacking, I freed up 50% of my income.

Just by reducing my taxes, my tax liability, and by eliminating my housing costs and that lets me work for a nonprofit. Traditionally, in nonprofit world, you don’t get paid a lot of money. You also don’t have lucrative benefits, stock options, retirement accounts, those type of things, where I know my retirement set from a real estate portfolio and through house hacking, we also, my wife and I have a huge passion for traveling.

I’ve been to 34 35 countries and she’s been to 40, every year we seem to take off for several weeks and travel. By knowing that we have zero housing costs, it’s really easy to say, let’s go to the middle east for three weeks and we don’t have to worry about covering a cost of rent or mortgage back home.

So it just gives you a lot of flexibility in life. So you’ve left the 40 hour a week type of job in an office. Both of you guys are no longer doing. That you can travel. O oddly enough, I ended up sometimes with the nonprofit work. I ended up spending 50, 60 hours a week, partly just because I love it.

But yeah, I work from home managing my real estate portfolio and then doing some nonprofit work. And then travel. So in 2019 we visited guitar, Egypt, Jordan. We went to Jamaica, we went to Mexico and then we visited family and friends throughout the us. So it’s just given us a lot of flexibility, but yeah, we definitely don’t travel full time.

That’s a little too much for us, now in our thirties, we like to have a home base that we can come back to in a regular bed we can sleep in. And we like to just go out and travel, for a long weekend, a week or several weeks at a time. Yeah. I hear you. We’re about the same age and it’s nice to have a garage so you can put stuff in it, right?

Yeah. A bunch of bigger toys. Maybe if you could go over like the high level of your portfolio, right now people are thinking you’re not the Airbnb guy, but the house hacking guy, but how does it look and what’s the percentages of, is it like half syndications, half active, more active income like this?

We’re currently living on our third house hack, which is essentially four units. And we’re currently renovating our fourth house hack, which is a duplex. That’s all we actively manage. When we move out of our third house hack, I’ll actually turn it over to a property manager.

and then I will, when we’re living in the duplex, I just use cozy to collect rent, manage maintenance request from that person living on the other side. That’s all that we own now. And then probably about 80% of my net worth is in syndications. And then the other 20% is in, IRA, 401k, Vanguard, brokerage account, where I take that, jail call and simple path to wealth.

Idea of investing where you’re in a index fund and passively invest that way. Outside of those, I guess it’s six units that I actively manage. Everything else is in syndications. And I think at this point, I’m, I don’t know, maybe in 10 syndications now, I think. And you made me chuckle a little bit.

You actually said you were gonna go visit one of these deals before you go invest in it. I always put it out to my investors. I’m gonna be in Huntsville later on this week. If anybody wants to come join along with me and out of the thousand or people, or so, only a handful of people come cuz everybody’s busy.

Like it’s a little hard except a guy like Andrew shows up cuz he’s got, nothing better to do no offense. That’s the kind of life you want. Exactly. Another thing, I think some folks get too lazy with passive investments where they’re like, oh, it’s passive.

I don’t have to manage it. And my approach has always been, yes, you’re investing in a syndication, but you should still check up on your syndicate or. And then also check up on the property. So I’ve used a service called we go look where if I’m not traveling to the area, you can hire, we go look and they’ll send out a Looker who will then take pictures of the property and you spend a hundred, hundred 50 bucks, I’ll do that where.

The syndicator will send back a report for us. I’ll actually send out. They like, oh, the report says they just renovated the roof. They did all new siding, did all new windows and did landscaping. He sent pictures, but let me spend 150 bucks to send someone out to verify that works actually done. And it wasn’t just something they pulled off the internet.

So I’m always big on while it’s passive. You still need to mind your investments and check up on them from time to. . Yeah. And when I have people come out, we check out units. But if you’re going out by yourself, you’re typically not gonna be able to do that, nor do we encourage ops to even talk with the property management.

A lot of these deals, there’s 50, a hundred guys that’s impractical and not very good LP etiquette, but. What I do recommend LPs do is go ahead and check out the property and walk it and get the feel for it. Is this really a, B, or is it more of a B class neighborhood?

Absolutely. Any insights there that things you key in on, like I know personally, I look for bars on the windows, in the, is it in a primary residence kind of areas and renters area? What kind of cars people are driving? Anything that you can. Kind of things you’ve picked out or things you look at when you do this.

It’s a brief and how long is the trip? Oh a lot of times it’s really short and I love the fact that you mentioned that sort of etiquette is. So when I go in, I don’t go bother the property management. I don’t disturb the tenants. It’s very much, I’m gonna go drive through the apartment community or walk through the apartment community.

Or I might go in not announcing that I’m an owner where if they’ve got, Open house, or if they’ve got the onsite office where I’ll go in and just ask about what apartments are renting for and get the materials. You definitely want to have some etiquette and don’t go in trying to act like you own the place.

Definitely have good etiquette. But yeah, what I like is I love to see where the closest Starbucks is. What’s the closest grocery store and then any other single family neighborhoods that are around, do they have window units? Do they have the AC units in the windows? Do they, like you said, the bars on the window, are there check cashing places close by?

Usually if there’s a check cashing close by you’re definitely a C or. Area unit, if there’s a Starbucks close by, you’re pretty much a B or an a, a class unit. So I try to look at those things. And then I also look at the schools and then what are the ratings of the schools that are close by?

And that can tell you a lot about an area as well. But yeah, most of the time I’ll try to visit friends in the area or go to do some nonprofit work. And then I might spend an hour or two where I’ll drive through the community and drive through their surrounding neighborhood. Just to get a sense.

What are the window? What are you looking for? The window units there? So a as an example, if you’re looking at a single family neighborhood and it looks like it’s an older neighborhood and there’s the window air conditioning units that tells me it’s no central air, no central heat. So it’s an older unit and.

Renovations haven’t gotten into that area yet. So if you drive down a street and you see half the houses have window AC units, it’s definitely more affordable housing, affordable rent area where you can go buy a window AC unit for a hundred bucks at lowes or home Depot, where to put in a central air AC and heat, you could spend eight, 10 grand or more.

It’s something that I always look for to tell what the neighborhood’s and that gives me indication if it is a, B or a C class area. Yeah. I look for the, if it is sort of sensor air which a lot of properties like in Alabama are, for example, If there’s a cage on it. When I had my single family, I always put cages on it.

If it was B minus or worse, I, oh yeah. I probably had two or three of those things grow legs and run away. Yep. I’ve been there. But it’s weird in some, in other markets like Texas, your class C stuff, they don’t have, it’s not normal to have cages on ’em so it’s all a regional thing. Texas, everyone carries guns in Texas yeah.

Yeah. And that was, you. Come up with these stories of reasoning. That was my reasoning too. It’s so hot there. It’s man, you just don’t do that. So Andrew runs fi by REI a A website, a lot about a lot of articles about house hacking.

You’ve got the podcast, you just check that out. But yeah, appreciate you coming on and yeah, you getting to know you a little better here. Thanks lane. And we’ll have to get you on our show to talk about your early house hacking experience and where you’ve been going with your real estate investing.

All right. Everybody out there. Thanks for listening. Join the investment club, simplepassivecashflow .com/club. And let’s get on the phone and let’s see what we can do to move you guys forward to financial freedom. It might not be an apartment deal, might not be a turnkey rental, sometimes it might just be a little a referral to the right CPA or some kind of tweak. Something’s better than doing the whole 401k thing, all right, guys, we’ll talk to you guys later. Bye

October 2022 Monthly Market Update

What’s up folks? This is the October, 2022 monthly market update where we go over different articles that I think are pertinent to real estate investors out there and probably other investors out there.

But if you haven’t yet, check out my book. The Journey is Simple, Passive Cash Flow, Passive Real Estate For the Working Professional. This is available on kindle and there’s the audio book version. If you guys wanna check out the YouTube version for free, you can go to simple passive cash flow.com/book.

But currently up to a hundred. Reviews, I think. So that’s cool. So at least a hundred people read it. Maybe more. If you guys are listening to this on iTunes, also check it out on the YouTube channel where you can check out all these cool slides that we have prepared for you guys. And then lot of, a lot of these articles have great graphs and visuals along with it.

But first thing off Starbucks plans to open 2000 new stores by 2025. Invest 450 million in existing locations. I think there’s a lot of Tucker recessions, but, I think you’re gonna see a lot of the big players have the capital to reinvest in, potentially rough times ahead or there could be some of the best times to invest.

All this is happening. While, they’re also applying to expand their mobile ordering offerings via the company’s app. So even with that, they’re still planning to expand real estate locations while HOP reports the 2022 safest cities in America. At the top of the list is Columbia, Maryland. Nashua, North Half New Hampshire, Laredo, Texas.

Portland, Maine. Orwick, Rhode Island. Yonkers, New York, Gilbert, Arizona. Huh? I didn’t know Gilbert was that safe. Burlington. I think it’s Virginia. Raleigh, North Carolina. Lewistown Main. For some of you guys who are curious, Honolulu, Hawaii is in the 75 and then some of the worst ones. La Chattanooga, Jackson, Mississippi, Oakland, Oklahoma City, Memphis, Baton Rouge, Detroit, San Bernardino, Fort Lauderdale, Saint Louis West.

Also on the same. Law enforcement employees per capital. Some of the top ones are Washington, DC, New York, New Jersey, St. Louis, Chicago. The fewest ones are font, California Monte, California, Fremont, California, Irvine, California, Trula Vista, California. Fewest traffic fatalities. And, that’s not too important.

You guys can check out that on the the channel. Later. So this is the, a little visual of the US 30 year fix just to, take that one data point. And these are all the month to month changes in the the interest rates basically. So what you’re seeing now is you’re seeing as of like quarter one of this year, Fed has been raising interest rates pretty greatly.

If this is all new to you, check out the podcast I did with Richard Duncan at simplepasscashflow.com/Duncan. We’ll tell you all about how that supply chain unemployment, you war Ukraine and Covid crisis and China, all is related. And I think after you watch that podcast slash video, I think it’s gonna make you a lot more comfortable with what’s happening out there.

The way I look at these kind of charts is, do you see the uptick right now? And in these upticks, they typically play themselves out a year. And that’s why I tell people, about 18 months from now, we should see the capital markets start to open up. And my prediction is we start to hit off to the races again.

That is, if you know the raising of interest rates is able to increase unemployment just slightly so we avoid a hard landing and do a soft landing recession. But you can see how in, few times in history, like the 19 eighties where the interest rates skyrocket a lot more than it did.

Now, some people I talk to, and this is more of an extreme point of view, think that the interest rates may need to get up to eight to 10%. We’re not there yet, how much more does the interest rates need to get pushed up so that unemployment comes back up? And unfortunately, home prices are gonna go down a little bit just because people aren’t gonna be able to get their affordability up to afford more via loans.

But that’s just a thought by product. Again, what we’re looking at is that unemployment to come up and for us to correct. And this is also the same thing. It’s, but it’s visualizing the interest rates in a little bit different fashion here. And we’re seeing this increase in 2022, the interest rates. And you see how it compares to the 2015 to 2018 climb, which was a lot longer and a lot more gradual. And then you see the nine, the 99, 2001, and then the big one.

I think the big one was like the 1980s there, so all this has been happened before and this is the one of the major levers that the Fed pulls to keep inflation at bay. This article, it’s talking about the rise of all of renters. Now, a lot of millennial renters are giving up ownership. Why? Because the prices of homes have gone away from them, even though they may be coming down. But affordability, due to the interest rates is allowing them to qualify for less. Now we don’t have any news, if any, May, Freddie Mac are gonna make things easier for borrowers to qualify for more.

But this this study done here by apartment list is suggesting that more and more millennials are just giving up and just saying, Screw it, we’re just gonna be renters. And gone up from, averaging around a 20% range at now, up to 24.7%. Of course this is all survey data, so you. Who know, survey data is always, there’s a level of fudge factor in there.

But I think that’s why we all are investors and we understand that the lower middle class, or at least the folks that are captured in this study, which are, the younger people not yet to their family formation years and they haven’t amass wealth yet, or down payments for properties.

It just makes more sense for them to rent. And this kind of coincides with a more mobile workforce, with people having to move around a lot for their jobs, especially because you’re not gonna be working at your job for the rest of your life. You’re gonna probably skip around and jump around to different employers.

Why are they saying that they’re not going to buy a house and instead rent forever? The biggest thing here is they just can’t afford it, which is 77% of their participants. Said that now this is the next excuse or if you wanna call it excuse, is I like the flexibility that renting provides, that has, that response has gone down slightly over the last few years.

And then also I prefer to avoid home maintenance and other additional costs. And other people think, I think buying a home is financially risk. I would say for most young people who are good at saving their money, I think buying a home is a bad thing to do. Although most people fall in the category of their bad worth, their money, and they need to force piggy bank at that point, I think buying a house makes more sense.

So if you’re confused by that and you’re a good saver, That’s how you say, join our club. Check out my article about buying a house to live in. Is it the right thing for you? Do you, which side of this paradigm do you fall in with the common guy who should buy a house or the people in our group who are, getting on the offense and buying assets and instead for going on buying that lovely primary house with the white picket fence.

I still rent, by the way, for what it’s worth. I practice what I preach for now. At some point I’ll probably wanna just enjoy life and spend my money for once. Also reports from Zumper, occupancy rates and the pace of rent increases are now falling in major metros as the renter.

Demand softens with fear of recession, kicks in with many renters assign as they put or trade down our most expensive option. And I think this is, we’ve had a quite a big of a run up, right? Some markets such as Phoenix, the rents were going up like 10 to 20% every. I know we just got back from Alabama where we had one property in particular where we had a lot of legacy tenants and we were rehabbing properties and we made the decision.

It’s finally time. After two years of ownership, that’s really time to bump up the rents up 25% and a lot of ’em are taking it. Every market is different, right? That’s why when you look at these national rent world statistics, you have to take it for with a grain of. But I would agree that in some markets, you know this, there people have this in the back of their head that perhaps Ace is looming as if that’s always a case, right?

Never know, but maybe me, people are using that as a means to, instead of springing for that $1,600 luxury apartment, just going for the $1,300 one. That makes sense. Which they should, I think. Also, maybe you can contribute this to the interest rates going up, but seller sentiment is decreasing with more inventory coming online in sales, taking longer to complete yet, I think you still seeing a lot of me major metros with the days under market of under a hundred, which is that, two to three months.

That’s considered a seller’s market. At that point because you don’t have that much inventory, but we’re still a lot of places still below that and therefore, or I dunno, therefore, or as a result we, there’s a general housing shortage, especially in some, particular markets. The growth states, their marching markets, as we call it.

Also millennials today are in their prime home buying years. The millennials are now 25 to 40. Man. How have they grown? According to the definition we use here as such, their home ownership rate has increased faster than any other generation over the past. Decade. So although we’re just talking about how they are gonna stay renters forever, the ones who are buying very quickly, a lot quicker than other generations prior to.

And maybe you can contribute to that, to the fact that in the Great Recession, 2008, 2010 era, that they just absolutely got beat. And it’s taken them well over a decade, almost a couple decades to recover. And the last five years they’ve greatly picked up the home buying. So this would be a great, if you guys were to come back to the YouTube channel.

If you’re listening on, we also put this on the podcast too for you guys who you’d like to drive in the car and listen. And I tried to describe these pictures as best as possible, this is probably one that you guys wanna check out on the YouTube channel, but it’s kinda interesting, if it has this, the lines of the silent generation, the baby boomers, Gen X, and they show the percent of home ownership rates.

Baby boomers have finally caught up with the silent generation. Maybe the silent generation is maybe no longer or statistically gone already, like they’re about that age already past the age 80. Not many of them are around it anymore. The. Baby boomers are potentially in the same clump with the silent generation that Gen X are sitting at 69%. Baby boomers and silent generation are about 78% home ownership, where the millennials at 48% at climbing.

What is the big issue with millennial renters not having down payment savings? Two thirds of prospective millennial home burners have no zero down, have zero down payment savings. Survey in 2022 said that 60 60% do not have any dedicated down payment savings, and only 60% have saved. $10,000, huh?

That’s pathetic. But hey, that’s what this national data is, right? A lot of you guys listening to these types of podcasts, at least our investor base, most of you guys, Our credit investors, making over six figures. And most of you guys, eh, I’d say if you make as a household 300,000, I typically see you guys saving 50 grand at least a year.

So you guys are definitely not the focus group captured in this pie chart. But, and I tell you that because number one, you take this data for a grain of salt. It’s not you particular driving in your car to your cool job. And it’s. Maybe an appreciation to it, right? Because if you’re listening to this and you have the time, you’re doing pretty good for yourself, but you can do better, right?

And that’s why we are further continuing along this financial independent journey together. If, and if that’s the case join our club simplepassivecashflow.com/club and let’s get to know each other a little bit better. We give everybody a free introduction call with myself.

I usually pretty quickly ascertain what the heck is going on and give you some pointers. I’m not fucking you financial advice cuz I’m not here to sell you some nonsense financial securities such, stock market stuff. But I’m just, I think it’s good that, when I talk to people, it’s not often that they get to size themselves up with people, their constituents, such as our.

A lot of you guys are the people who max up your 401ks, make good salaries, maybe even be the, the best person in your family financially let alone your friend group. And it’s. It’s nice to compare yourself with people who are also financially minded. That said, you keep doing that too much, you start to get really depressed and sometimes it’s good to compare down.

But no I think this is why it’s good for, if you guys have never made it out to a retreat, we always allow you guys to come to the, one of these events at least once to test drive our organization. Make sure you’re part of the club because the The retreat event page is going, is almost done, and we’ve got a hotel pick for Waikiki, so we’re gonna be releasing that and then ticket sales are going to be going starting here in the next month. So be on the lookout for that.

US apartment construction on track to reach 50 year high in 2022 is interesting, right? Supposedly we’re in a recession right now, or maybe some people have dub gloo, but, or is that just the unsophisticated investors out there? Because the institutional smart money, the developers, they are.

Building like crazy right now. A part of that is the obvious fundamental shortage in housing. Like New York developers have upped their game and the Metro is projected to see the highest number of units this year, surpassing Dallas Fort Worth Metro for the first time in And this is despite headwinds related to labor, shortfalls, material costs, and availability and supply chain issues.

This is that first article in a many that I’m gonna show where, the professionals, the institutions are in a way kind of doubling down as you saw Starbucks did, as we mentioned at the top of the call. So where are they building? I’m just gonna read up from the top to the bottom. New York, Dallas, Miami. Austin, Houston, Texas, Phoenix, Arizona. Ooh, that one’s a little small. I can’t see it. Atlanta, Georgia. Washington dc. Los Angeles, Orlando, Denver, Nashville, Raleigh, Charlotte, Chicago, Portland, San Francisco, Twin Cities. So those are the year from the top to bottom, top 20 metros for our compartment construction in 2022.

John Burns. He released this great infographic on the top, 10 signs of a market bubble. Some things that were not seen that normally would be indicative of a market bubble is, very high supply. We have very low supply right now. Days in their market in most places are under a hundred days, and so that’s not happening.

Other things, luxury cars for the staff. When you start to see shippers buying , just using a reference from that big, short movie. But when you start to see, regular blue collar folks jobs, buying luxury cars, that’s the time to scratch your head and that’s not happening. The other thing that’s not happening is creative mortgages, right?

Like after 2008, the federal government got involved and built a lot of fail safes. And then the last thing, the mortgage defaults and arms, we don’t have that anymore. Or at least it’s not as prevalent. And that is one of the, some of the things that are not happening that are indicative of a housing bubble.

There are some other things, and which is why I think we’ve already been in a recession for the last couple quarters. But the industry publications I read are saying we’re gonna be in this state in the next year. I think it’s gonna be more like 18 months, but 20, 24 we should be often running.

And I think it’s a mistake to wait. But just change your type of investing, right? Don’t go after these kinds of deals where there’s no equity or collateral, right? So what am I talking about? Maybe like in crypto or OutCo or ATM mining stuff, unless it’s with an industry leader or somebody with an unfair advantage, those are type of business that don’t really have any collateral behind them, which is why I still like investing in real estate. Now, if you really wanna be uber conservative, investing in real estate world is pretty conservative, but maybe stay away from some of the more heavier value add type of stuff and stick to more on the debt side or stabilize yield place.

So Hurricane Ian impacted the Florida’s apartment market. What’s the impact from that? Expect demand from vacant units, from displaced homeowners that’ll prob likely reverse a 2022 trend of declining occupancy rates across Florida. I don’t have any properties in Florida anymore. I had a DI in Putta Goda that luckily sold although, that’s what you got insurance for, but, I had some properties in the Gulf that we saw prior to this, and it’s a, I think this hurricane e, like an insurance broker told us that, man, if there’s one more major storm it comes through.

I don’t know who knows what the insurance rates are gonna be. I can say on a few deals that we had, insurance costs went up like threefold from what it originally was. And then who knows what this is gonna be? my thinking is that the insurance rates are gonna be so high or uninsurable that the federal government’s gonna have to get in and help back so people can buy insurance so people can live there.

But we’ll see how that plays out. But for now, hopefully that Tampa area recovers pretty quickly. This commercial property executive article continues with this catastrophic loss impact to insurance and reinsurance carriers. Carriers would be firmer in the requirement for increases and pressure on the magnitude of their thought process.

Retail and restaurants are probably the most vulnerable, but maybe not the most expensive. A lot of companies, especially in Florida, do plan to for catastrophic and for more expense it would be to replace their equipment. Then more seriously, they take it already. Florida was already seeing challenges in terms of securing capacity, high instruction costs, and supply chain issues.

Hurricane Ian has the potential to exasperate these market issues while making insurance difficult to find and maintain, and I would personally add on. , We’ll see what the premiums increase this next goal around.

So one trend that’s happening, multifamily developers are turning some dead space office into apartments. We’ve gotten involved in that as a group too, just know that these are some of the most difficult from an engineering perspective, cuz you’re tying into existing systems where if it were me and future developments, I would just prefer to.

Start off what we call the green field, right? Where we have a just. A flat bearing land. We finished the Chase Creek apartments. We were out there last week. We have move-ins now. Yay. It looks amazing. It’s a lot better than what I thought it was going to be. We’ve initially came up with the idea and man, did that project come together so quickly.

I believe summer of 2021 were where the con, the concrete pads were getting installed and, It didn’t take much more than a few months for the frames to get construction and then it to start to look like apartment complexes. So we’ve got 230 units out there in Huntsville, Alabama. Plan is to do more and if you guys wanna jump on the next deal, get to know us and join the club.

Jim Costello, Chief economist at s c I real Estate says the key issue people do not understand is just how difficult and expensive these conversions can be. And I think that’s what I mentioned earlier.

So here’s a trend that I’ve been tipping my investors, especially those who joined the club. With the difficulties in the capital markets, we were seeing Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac get a lot less aggressive on lending and giving outsource terms back in March and April, and now we’re starting to see some of the secondary lenders, community banks, et cetera, do the same.

Gray Star, which is traditionally one of the bigger operators out there, they’re starting to offer financing to multifamily borrowers because of this need, right? As big players pull out, there is a demand and folks like Gray Star are filling that void with obviously higher rates because that’s what the going rate is.

But this is also why we’ve switched. Our mindset and our acquisition strategy, and that’s why we’re really not doing deals anymore. I really don’t know how people are making these deals pencil these days with interest rates where they are, and because they can’t get really good lending, and this is where we’ve starting to fund deals as a lender.

Because it is a lot more secure, especially in uncertain times in the head, but still, still you gotta outpace inflation, right? And, we have to still remain active. In a way, we’re copying what Gray Star is doing here. The good news though is multifamily fundamentals remain strong.

A lot of people expect loan demand bounce that bounce back next year. Multifamily remains a favorite investment class and has continued to perform well. Another, this is more for the advanced investors out there, but commercial property Executor is commenting on the benefits of in interest rate caps at this time like this.

So interest rates, caps are, most times people are doing bridge loans these days, and the bad thing about the bridge loans is the rate can potentially jump up on you. Of course, if you’re doing value add, it’s not a huge deal because you’re generating so much force appreciation and you’re always gonna be, you should be in theory, over water or above water.

But one way you can mitigate that is doing a interest rate cap. So your interest rates can’t go above, say a percent or two. It is costly though, and though the Feds policy are raising the Fed’s funds rate and quantitative timing to help with inflation should eventually provide builders some relief.

It’s no wonder that in recent months borrow who plan to start construction projects have been asking their debt capital sources for fixed rate notes. . But in a way this is like an insurance policy or hedging. You pay little money for that that rate cap.

But right now they’re really expensive because everybody and their mother knows that interest rates are likely to go up several times at a half a point, three quarter point intervals. This is where I, I’m speculating we get into eight to 10% range for just regular, 30 year mortgages for people and then, it’ll go back down.

But this is where these rate caps are extremely expensive for folks, for operators. But here, you’re seeing, you can buy different term lengths and then the cost of doing them. For those people who buy options and calls and things like this type of chart will look very familiar to you guys. But, it’s, in the financial world is a lot.

Know, kind of these charts and in a way you’re just gambling at what’s happening in the future and you’re pricing in risk. Ari business online is, talking about battle over rent control. So municipalities in New York and California, these, more blue states have taken steps towards enacting further rent control. What states, such as Nevada are shooting them down entirely. These are the batter ground.

States to watch if you’re a landlord. Only five states, California, Maryland, New Jersey, New York, Oregon and Minnesota and DC have rent control laws in place. 31 states have preemptives that prevent rent control policies, including Florida, whose law bans local governments who controlling the price of rent in certain cases.

As one, California, New York probably need the the nation. They follow each other as a group. So they, to me as an investor, it’s always good to have one eye on this, but, if you’re one of those people gets stressed out and freaked out about all this type of stuff, don’t worry about it.
Just diversify your portfolio and you try and stay one step ahead of the curve and invest in the states that aren’t going to go down this.

There was a, an article here that kind of talked about the ground looks shaky. The safe thing is to dude, is to build multi-family assets. And this is the approach that we’re personally taking as we start to pick up more parcels of 20 to 50 acre pieces of land. If you guys have any let us know.

We’ll buy it from you because there is a, it’s a very safe play. If you can structure your contracts and you have the. The educated personnel and experience to take a dry piece of land or entitle piece of land and turn it into the highest and greatest use, which could be a class, a apartment, of course work.

Cross housing is a sector we still like to stay in. You have a lot of room for margin. I think the numbers on the last one, we just built like 180 grand with all hard and soft costs 188 grand per unit, we should be able to sell it for at least two 50 here in a bit. So you’re talking a huge profit margin right there.

And what I’m learning is that sophisticated investors, they don’t really care about the cash flow along the every month or every quarter. Because they have a bigger balance sheet, higher network or jobs. But what they care about is security and, making bigger racks of equity. And that’s what the developments come in.

So we’re gonna be focusing more and more on this. So if you guys want the insight scoop on this make sure you guys are part of the club and you completed your onboarding protocols. Call with myself, et cetera. And first step, go to simplepassivecashflow.com/club. The Congress passed Inflation Reduction Act, which everybody joked and, uttered that.

Yeah. How the hell can you create an inflection reduction act when you’re spending billions of dollars in the process, but not much from my circle has come, ways you can use this. One of the most significant benefits of was the ira ex is the expansion of the Advanced Energy Project tax credit.

This allows you to credits up to 30% of the investment property using qualifying advanced energy project that is certified by the department Energy. So what does that mean? I think this is the point where they write it and then they administer some letters down the road. So some of the drawbacks that came out of this inflation reduction act is an enactment of the corporate minimum book tax. Minimum tax would be 50% of book income, which is amount of income showed on the applicable corporations financial statements.

Fortunately, this doesn’t really infect individuals like any stimulus checko, right? But this goes out to the municipalities. The states are already providing some economic development incentives for new or expanding manufacturing facilities, either in the form of property tax exemptions or income tax credits.

So some things that are not included in the final edition of the bill are changes to the carried interest requirements that would’ve had a tremendous negative impact on the multi-family industry. So what carried interest is some. Sponsors, general partners who only get paid when passive investors get paid there.

There’s some tax benefits to that. It gets taxed at a different rate, or like the big mutual funds or big, big funds out there, those leaders get paid off. Carried interest That has been left off the table. I’m just, I’m pointing this out because this is just another thing that they put in there to scare everybody.

Or maybe the Republicans put it there to scare of Democrats or who knows, vice versa. But a lot of these things put in there and then when these things are actually written, most of these concerns just fall off the map. What was the last one earlier this year was they were gonna threaten everybody’s self-directed IRAs, where you, now you had to get this cumbersome type of, Appraisal done every single time. That costed you a fortune. You know that stuff like that. They put it out there and then they pulled it back at the last revision.

So how the inflation direction will affect multifamily Some things that are impacting those you guys who invest in apartments the base tax credit efficient commercial buildings deduction. The new energy efficient home credit will now apply to all buildings that meet energy staff, multifamily, new construction programs to 2032. So that’s an extension there.

Other things. One, building in total grants to help states adopt recent residential commercial building energy codes, 8 million to HUD to provide grants for loans for affordable housing properties. So that, I think that helps out a lot of investors here. That just means better when the capital markets do open up a little bit, that’s the money to you know, back and ensure some of these loans.

Then just over three billing for funding for state and local governments to improve neighborhood access and equity, including infrastructure improvements in antis displacement policies. I don’t know if it was in this program, but I do know. That additional funding got released. Lisa, were talking with our operations folks who sit down with the tenants to help them apply for government assistance.

That funnel was back on, some of the buildings in certain municipalities or ju or under the viewpoint of certain judges, going through the eviction process. Some, there are people getting those government checks, that government assistance. So that’s good news for us.

A multi-housing news says some horn prefer single family rentals discovered that one in four owners would live in a rental house if they could find a place that meet their exact needs. And I always question these types of surveys because it’s sure they would love to live in a house, but can they afford the damn.

Just like a lot of our investors, they always say, this happens two or three times a year. I get investors saying, Yeah, I’m gonna be talking with my tenant in my rental property, and they wanna owner finance it. So it’d be a great way to not pay taxes and get a good price. And I’m like, I laugh because it’s Dude, I’ve never seen that happen.

Every tenant wants to buy the house. They live. And none of ’em have the credit score, let alone $10,000 to the name for a down payment. So you’re better off just selling the thing, unlocking the equity, and then putting it into other syndications or buying more rentals. But I’m just telling you, if you guys are listening out there and you have tenants ain’t gonna happen.

It’s just they run their credit score first. Make sure it’s at least over 6 50, 700. If not. It’s a pipe. Here’s what the the big guys are doing. So when Blackstone, a private equity giant, flowed the idea of creating vast portfolios of homes after the global financial crisis, the banks view refused to lend it. One of the firms Ran the idea by Sam z, a property mobile who sold Blackstone, his 39 billion office empire before the financial crisis.

Said no way for a investor routinely sping on hotel chains and swanky office towers. The buy to let business seem like small fight by comparison. Now you’re seeing like a lot of these Wall Street companies snapping up family homes, single family homes, just. Mom and Paul investors, but unlike you guys, mom and or mom and Paul investors out there who tend to own no more than a handful of homes, the biggest institutions hold tens of thousands of these things and offered renovation and probably run these things a lot more tighter ship.

There’s obviously, we’ve seen this before, 2009, 2012, where these guys would come in and they’re not super effective at, managing. These portfolios, they’re coming in again and it could be an opportunity for some of you guys to unload some of yours, but just know that it’s, I’ve always thought like single family homes was like a last frontier that, the regular person could buy, get into real estate and transcend themselves to a credit investor status and beyond without having to work at a high paid job for more than a decade.

Seems like that, that this little opportunity may be going away. It’s sad. It’s sad. It’s if Sanel created like a trillion dollar fund to go after the essential oil companies and compete directly head in head with them and all their direct multi-level marketing consultants essentially the same.

don’t know why they would do that, but if they did a Fannie Mae projects modest recession in 2023 the combination of high inflation monetary policy tightening and slowing housing market will likely tip the economy in a modest recession next year. I would argue we’re already there. As I do believe the second quarter of negative GDP growth, which we had, is a definition of a recess.

Fannie Mae Pilots positive only rent payment reporting program. So here’s one of the things that I, I uncovered that Fannie Mae is, like pseudo government entity, they launched this program to they’re only gonna report the payments made so that they. Let the credit bureaus and also people can start to improve their credit scores now when they’re renting.

Now I don’t know what, like a non-report of a positive, one’s gotta assume that the dude didn’t pay, but it’s, I think this is a, as a landlord or a property owner, I like this because it gives me some insight into who the heck we are renting. That there’s some kind of trended history there instead of just some random people off the internet or Craigslist people, you, I joke there, but, or people coming off the street literally.

But that’s something that they’re putting together and they’re, the reason why they’re doing is they want people to improve their credit scores to eventually buy houses to live, or, at least the qualified ones South region sees the most pandemic error, revenue growth. We’ve talked about this many times. The particular metric focus on rent row, but does not include many these or concessions. So it provides a nice apples to apples comparison of revenue performance across regions and markets.

The northeast, again, really outperform through 2020, in fact, A in the west region there was a slight declined. Both the West and the South saw revenue increases of about 10 cents per square foot during 2020.

V reports rising rent, please. Prices are keeping inflation high. It’s a chicken and egg thing. Is it the rents going up? Is it pay going up or is it just general inflation? Either way it’s all going up. The typical US monthly rent was $2,090 in August, up 12.3% from a year before is much higher than it was before the pandemic.

In February, 2020, the national average rent was 16 at 60. So e economic policy makers closely watch rent prices, not only because consumers spent spend a big portion of their budgets on housing, but also because the categories a major contributors. So set to inflation shelter is a larger component to the CPI making up 30% of the or in inflation. You know what’s messed up about the inflation numbers?

Like they don’t take into account like oil prices and some other things. You guys can check out, like there’s a lot, if you google this train of thought that I’m having, it’s, you’re gonna probably agree with me, but to me, I don’t like how they include like housing. Housing is such a huge thing, part they have to, but I almost like to be an industry like in like oil and gas, like where.

You can just increase your prices on people and then it doesn’t get captured in the cpi. But that’s just my side comment there. One of the questions that we get a lot, and in this article in its title, Do households flock to BC properties during recessions and. BC apartment performance certainly does hold up better than Class A in times of economic stress. Based on, the two graphs here showing, the sustainably higher rent growth than Class A properties.

Maybe about double that. Not all recessions or economic stress are the same. So The pandemic was very interesting because you had people working from home who were more on the higher end. Your white collar workers, your knowledge workers who work from home and order Ubers eats and they were pretty untouched.

And where your b and c workers, where your frontline workers, you’re people who have, expendable jobs, where when people went out of business, they cut those jobs. Those are people who struggled the most during the pandemic. So the complete opposite. What would happen in a normal economic stress or recession, but in a typical recession, that’s what this happens.

And this is why we effectively invest in workforce housing. And this is why I would not really suggest like building a portfolio entirely of short term rentals, right? Cuz it’s more of a discretionary item. Now we are gonna be rolling out I’m gonna be getting involved in some of that type of stuff, so stay tuned.

So make sure you guys, jump on the the newsletter email list. Again, like you wanna diversify portfolio. But primarily most of my portfolio is in this workforce housing sector. I don’t do that much Class C these days. I’m not a huge fan of that type of stuff. I still like the class B stuff.

Board. This is from Moody’s Analytics. By the way. During the last three recessions, both class A and BC absorption levels declined from their respective cyclical peaks, but class A levels and deltas actually remain relatively stronger than Class Bs, which is exactly what I was mentioning. The pandemic hurt the lower end instead of the upper end, which is a little.

There’s this really cool class cut absorption and rep income that we have on the screen here. If you guys can check out later, I’m not gonna get into it too much, but the last point here is after recession’s official end that many households. Those have been out of work for a long while or have had to take a job with a reduced hours, or incomes have burned through much of their savings and are finally forced to trade down.

So there can be quite a bit of a leg. No different than like the leg that we’re seeing right now with inflation, right? We’ve been trying to get that damn thing down, but there’s just so much liquidity in the system, right? Because if you go look at the Rich Duncan videos, there’s so much fake money pumped into the system.

That it’s gonna take a while for that money to vacate, for inflation to come down. No different than, most people generally have some savings out there. It takes a while, a leg for that to, expend out for people to finally say, Oh my God, I gotta change. I gotta go to a cheaper rent apartment.

Two straight quarters, a negative GDP growth and persistent inflation signal that the US economy is starting down a recession in the near future, if not one in already. Class B and C rent growth has outpaced class a’s through the first half of 2022, and in the first quarter of the year, class B. C absorption outpace Class A for the only, the second time in the over two decades tracking this data.

It’s a sign that household budgets are a bit pinched due to inflation, but it is also a reflection of minimal supply growth and a more social problem of persistent income inequality. Two things unlikely to improve over the next couple of years. The risk get richer, the poor get poured. Whether it’s right or wrong, it is what it is and that’s happening.

And as an investor, you guys need to understand that and put your money in the right places. I would so argue that Class B and C are probably the places to be if you wanna play a more hedge strategy. Although as an operator of 8,500 units, I will also say that It’s not all smooth sailing month to month, right?

You try and go into deals where there’s adequate cash flow, but you have to protect the asset, which means having enough cash reserves and if you. From a month to month basis, you’re gonna have higher months of vacancy, evictions, et cetera, than others. And this is why we’re switching and focusing on a lot more developments in the future.

We don’t have to deal with all that tenants, toilets and termites in a way. So he’s gone full circle again. But I think, you have to diversify your portfolio and all kinds of things and. In the alternative investment world,

and that comes up to the end folks. So we’re gonna be doing the retreat in January to 2023. So join the club to get first access to that simplepassivecashflow.com/club. Those you guys are in the family office group. The phone, you guys are gonna get first crack at it. So if you guys are in that group, When we send you guys your checkout forms, sign up for it as soon as possible because you guys get the best pricing and we try to hold slots for you guys.

But after a while, we need to know what our head count is. We need to know who’s coming. If not, I’m going to get stressed out and we need to plan the activities for that three day retreat here in Hawaii. That’s gonna be coming out probably after Halloween time, so you guys have some time if you guys are new to the group get on board. And if not, check out the book, simplepassivecashflow.com/book and I will see you guys next month.

 

In Depth: How Infinite Banking HELPS You as an Investor

On today’s podcast, we are going to be replaying the almost two hour long webinar that we did on the introduction to infinite banking. Now, if you guys wanna check this out on the YouTube channel, go to simple passer cash flow.com/banking. And you can access the YouTube video there. So you can also go along with the slides. I wanted to leave it here because I think a lot of you guys are audio learners and also the team has gone on the road this past week.

Depending on when you’re listening to this audio we are either getting over our October 1st Napa valley hangover. Or we are already doing our property tours and our grand opening party of our new Chase Creek apartments in Huntsville, Alabama.

If you guys have been trying to get a hold of us to book your introductory calls with us, we can get to know you a little bit better. Please get on that right away because my schedule is booked up as I get back into the swing of things later on in October, but super happy to meet all of you guys in person.

If it’s not too late, please sign up for that October 6th, seventh in Huntsville, Alabama, If you really like this infinite banking concept again, you can go to simple passive cash flow.com/banking, and you can get access to this video, of course, but you can also get access to the two to three hour long eCourse where you can go through each of these sections. We dive into a lot more detail in more, a readable and short video.

Format. So if you guys put in your email address in there, it will get you access to the closed end member site where you get access to infinite banking eCourse enjoyed this webinar that we.

Welcome everybody. This is the intro to infinite banking. Here’s what’s gonna go on in the next couple hours. We prepared this deck and we added a bunch of slides, including some use cases. I also look at my working sheet here that I use to keep track of my infinite banking.

And, when money goes out alone, it comes back. But this is meant to be a CRA school for a lot of you folks. We see a lot of familiar faces. A lot of folks who’ve joined us recently and the infinite banking is new to them. Even some people who have policies on the line today it’s always good to review a little bit. But I would say we’ll knock this out in under an hour’s presentation, but we’ll have time for plenty of questions.

But just a little bit of background on myself. I grew up in Hawaii. Seattle’s 2003 to 2017. I Have a wife, a child, a dog and a Ford Raptor are the things that I have these days, no longer an engineer and then real estate. I started with that first rental in 2009, and then I got up to 11 rentals in 2015.

But since then, as the investor group has grown 1.2 billion to assets on their ownership, 8,500 units, 55 projects, and about 95, 90, 95 people in our family office group. That’s our inner circle mastermind group. And also joining me Tyler Fuka. Why don’t you introduce yourself a bit, Tyler?

Yeah. Hi, I’m Tyler Fuka. I am also married, have two boys. I do have a dog. I forgot to update that. I grew up in Hilo, Hawaii. Then I went off to the University of Washington to study engineering. I was there on a ROTC scholarship. So when I graduated, I got commissioned as a Naval officer stationed out at Mayport, Florida in Jacksonville, went to grad school in Monterey, California, and then moved here to wahoo where I’ve been since 2006 came here as active duty.

As an engineering duty officer transitioned out in 2009. To basically become a civil servant or DLD engineer did a lot of project management, construction management, a supervisor, and then eventually moved over to the department of veterans affairs. And he was a chief engineer there for a while.

Up until 2001, when I left, I decided to leave the W2 world. As far as real estate investing, I’ve been investing since 2002. My path then was single family rentals and doing what we call house hacking back then. I got up to, four single family rentals and basically got overloaded with work life and investing took a pause, started really looking at alternative investing in 2017 ish met lane in 2018 and just been totally doing syndications mainly from there on and where or lane really opened up our eyes as far as insurance wise always been interested in that.

I got introduced to the infinite banking concept. Probably about 10, 10 years ago. Didn’t really do anything with it. Although when I was in Lane’s group and other groups, I was with, I, we kept on hearing about infinite banking. So I eventually got my license in 2019 mainly to study and learn about the details of the industry, the different products available and then been helping lanes groups since then or licensed across the state.

So we basically can serve anywhere. Yeah. And a little bit more context of that, cuz it’s always fun for people to learn the story. I heard about this a while back ago. This infinite banking strategy, I would say since 2017 and I tasked Tyler with learning about this stuff, cuz I knew there were a lot of commissions in fees and it’s a strange product that, it’s not as straightforward as deals to me.

So I asked them to learn it more so to eventually do a policy for myself. So I wouldn’t get gouged with pricing and Tyler would be up front with how it all worked. I also, we also told you to go learn notes and what assisted living facilities are. Which those didn’t work out as, as well as this as most things don’t it’s funny, like those assisted living facilities, I haven’t really found anybody who does that halfway decent.

There was just like a house, like a few blocks away, like an illegal assisted living facility that got taken down by police recently. But it’s like this thing stuck. And we do this for a lot of the clients and the whole point is we crunch the commission and fees as low as they can go.

So in other words, if you guys have a policy, you’re looking at some other policies, probably beat him. But as I learned and what I’m happy about, Tyler kind of focusing it on full-time is that there’s this whole complex structure and we’ll maybe get into it a little bit, past the lowering the commissions as low as possible and past like the 90, 10 70 30 split, which we’ll talk about today, but there’s bunch of other ways that I don’t personally understand to customize it to what you guys want.

But yeah, this is, brief illustration. I think what a problem that most investors face, which is what the heck do I do with my short term liquidity, midterm liquidity, or my college savings before I put it into longer deals, right? Three years, seven year deals, that’s ideally where you wanna put your money, cuz that’s where you’re gonna make a higher rate of return.

Sure. Might be a little bit more risky, but it comes with a higher reward. You don’t really have 50 grand, a hundred grand ready to go all the time. The infinite banking, this is just one example of the many use cases. And I’ve created maybe about four or five use cases to use this very, a flexible kind of strategy, but it fits in my whole, 1, 2, 3 trifectas of simple passive cash list.

But if you’re new to simple passive cash flow, it’s first investing in good deals with honest people where you don’t get your money stolen, where you get higher returns than the retail stock market mutual funds, et cetera. And then number two, you, by getting all these passive losses through deals and other tax benefits, such as going from ordinary income to passive income you could unlock a lot of tax maneuvers and then obviously that creates more money for you to invest and then put more money into us. The third strategy, which is infinite banking here which is what we’re talking about.

This is something that we’ll get into, but this is basically a strategy. A lot of the wealthy will do. I dug up this video cuz I wanted to date how long we’ve been talking about this thing. Dug up this video from 2017 when I was a really shitty speaker back at Toastmasters, I was talking about this thing.

I was awkwardly taught to use my hands when I talk. We’ve been talking about this thing for quite some time and I didn’t really get a policy till much later than this and or it took me a long time to wrap my hands around. So if it’s confusing to you guys, sit back and, we can, we’ll open it up for questions at the end, but you it’s something that I think that it takes a while to understand like a lot of investors understanding the difference between ordinary income and passive income and how passive income can be offset by passive losses.

It’s a simple concept. And I think, we have a lot of engineers in our investor group and sometimes the engineers can over analyze this whole thing, in the banking I’m talking specifically about if that’s maybe taking a step back. It’s really not that difficult, but. It took me a little while to understand this whole thing.

Basically, getting rid of the middle man here we’ll talk a little bit about how big companies use these bank on life insurance, but to me of the main points about using these infinite banking policies is you’re making an interest rate and, , there’s a middle man here by with the bank is how normally it works.

But by using this life insurance policy, you cut out the bank in a way, and you make a little bit of that spread back. . Yeah. One, one of the main benefits is you’re recapturing your earning power or the opportunity costs. Cuz once your funds leave the bank that earning power for that dollar is lost.

Banks, they make their money basically off of how they have deposits come into them, they’re landing the money out. So whenever the money exits the bank it continues to earn funds. Similarly with the life insurance policy, we’re putting funds into the policy, we’re able to access those funds and not still have those dollars in the policy earning and not lose that opportunity to, for that dollar to continue to earn while you’re using that dollar somewhere else.

I’ll do it quickly, so yeah. So what is infinite banking? It truly is a concept of what I was mentioning before about recapturing those losses. You basically are utilizing an asset where you’re able to basically use that dollars, keep it in that asset, but obtain that dollars through alone.

And that there’s multiple ways of doing that. And now you’re able to have your funds work in two different places. So the original asset will be growing. And then the dollars that you access, you can do what you want and you could use it for expenses. You could use it for investing. You could use it for college planning or retirement planning, but that’s the overall concept.

The vehicle of choice that we choose to use for various reasons is dividend paying whole life insurance. And there’s multiple benefits with whole life insurance. And there are other products out there, but whole life specifically, there’s a level premium. So that’s one of the main benefits. The insurance costs and fees are pretty set as at, in regards to the insurance premiums themselves.

There’s guaranteed growth. And it’s right now, tho those ranges around two or 3% guaranteed seems small, but when we’re talking long term wise, this is uninterrupted compounded growth, and that steady growth can then help you plan, for long term. You can be used for multiple things, investing education.

So five, it could, this could replace your five to nine. Your 401k IRA you could use as your own bank to use it for lending instead of car loans, mortgages, and then it also is a safe place to store your capital. That’s where I personally keep my reserves also. There’s of course we’re not designing it for the death benefit, but there is, there is a death benefit component to it that helps with legacy planning or will transfer to different generations.

You are accessing the growth of the policies tax free. There’s no capital gains. There’s no income tax because the way you’re utilizing it is via loans. It follows what you may hear as the buy borrow die strategy, where you’re really purchasing this asset. It grows and you’re borrowing as the asset grows, you’re borrowing from it.

And that way you’re eliminating capital gains along with income taxes. And the policy isn’t designed in a way where you don’t have to pay for your entire life. So traditional whole life you, that you may have, there’s a premium due usually to age 95, 99, or a hundred. We design it where there is a cutoff at some point.

And even though you’re no longer contributing, the policy continues to earn dividends and that dividends then helps to boost up the value of your policy in the form of death benefit along with cash value. So this is a, there’s a handful on this slide. And again I’m gonna go over this in my, in a different way, cuz I think people learn in very different ways.

And although I do think that the most effective way of learning this is talking to somebody who just went through the process with Tyler and it’s fresh in their head and they’re, they’re using the loans or taking loans from themselves, funding the policy and then using it in their whole investment strategy.

Although, we obviously can’t recreate that on a virtual seminar, but that’s why we do the retreats. That’s why I tell people to come out to Napa, come out to Huntsville, meet other investors. So you can talk about, how you’re using this type of stuff. Just speaking from my own personal experience what I do is I, I max fund my policies and I store a cash value in there.

And Tyler mentioned the word asset, right? What’s the asset, right? In this case, I think a lot of people. The way to think about it is, think about it exactly like a HELOC right. You have a house and that was your asset, right? You might be paying it off or you have equity in there, but you use a HELOC to tap that equity, taking loans against that and paying the interest to that loan.

But you can use that loan to a lot of you guys will, who are new or using that HELOC to invest in your first few, several deals, same thing here, except instead of house being the asset is this paper, whole life policy, which is probably one of the most secures pieces of assets out there because the underlying that the asset is backed by these insurance companies that have been paying out dividends since the civil war much more secure than your average bank out there.

But, as Tyler mentioned, there’s a lot of benefits to doing it. I’ll highlight the guaranteed cash value growth. So when, just like how you HELOC your money’s in your asset, which is the house in this case your money is in the asset, which is the whole life policy.

It continues to grow just like the house does. So that’s where that guaranteed cash value comes from. The, and then the tax leave loans and withdrawals, that’s part of how I use it, right? So when my money’s in here, it grows with that. And. At that point, it’s considered tax free per the IRS.

And this is an important thing. We’ll get to later designing the policy. So you don’t go over that minimum threshold. Certainly you don’t wanna overfund it too much, cuz we’ll talk about fees, commissions and try to lower that as much as possible. By having it in this life insurance policy it’s the tax loophole to have this thing grow tax free.

And then when you take withdrawals or you take loans from your policy to go in and invest it or do whatever you need to do with the money. Lot times if you’re smart, you can have that be a business expense and has it have it be tax deductible. But we’ll hammer a lot of this stuff multiple times here.

Other ideas, doctors and high net worth investors like to use this as the asset protection component. And then, I’ve personally cond this with Ivo trust for simplicity of the use. I can talk about that at the end with another use case. But again, lot of stuff here, but basically it’s like a HELOC where you can take loans from it and then pay it back and have this be a constant source of capital.

That’s also grow. But it’s much better than a HELOC for three reasons. First, the banks can pull your HELOC at any point, right? They can freeze credit lines. They can’t do this with your infinite banking. And this is the whole where the whole term comes from family vault and people call this a family vault, but, or being your own bank, you own this policy, this asset is yours. The second big thing on, why this is better than the using your own HELOC you have the asset protection when your money is in under this policy, it’s protected, just like how, a lot of people will think they’re retirement accounts, the 401k are protected from creditors and litigators.

And then, the, my biggest thing, why I don’t like the helos is, they’re great to get started, but you can’t use the HELOC to tap all the equity. A lot of times your banks are gonna play games with you on your appraisals and then lower your loan to value on that loan with the bank.

None of that nonsense games, when you’re doing your own infinite banking policy, you can pretty much always, it’s not like you have, you can’t touch a certain amount of equity in the policy. If you’re using your HELOC now to go into deals. Cool. But eventually what most people will do is they’ll transition the equity into an infinite banking policy for the mentioned reasons.

Real quick. Okay. There, there are some questions being type. So if people have questions yeah. I think we want them, they can type it in during the presentation, we’ll probably cover some of those. And then at the end we’ll make sure to go over all of those. Is that yeah. Yeah. And put it into the question and answer box, cuz it allows us to check it off once we’ve answered it.

But if something is pertaining to the slide we’ll try and get to it for sure. Just all the random questions. Maybe hold to the end, cause we’ll probably answer it like Tyler said. But if you guys have been paying attention, we met, we uttered the words, whole life insurance and typically the whole life insurance is quite the scam.

I’ll be the first one to tell you, right? This is the one where your long loss acquaintance from college or high school, or maybe grade school hits you up on LinkedIn or Facebook or Instagram or for some of the younger people TikTok or whatnot. And they say, you wanna go to lunch and they sell you this like garbage whole life policy that was configured with high amounts of insurance, where is basically where all the commissions and fees come from, which again, what we cranked down to the minimums for you guys in our.

And, it’s just not a very good policy. And this is where Dave Ramsey and those guys say, yeah, just do term life. Whole life is a scam. So I just wanted to just, mention, yes, we are using whole life, but it’s configured in a very different way, but this is actually something that like my spouse got suckered on.

And then, what Tyler can also do is if you have a whole life policy, there are things that you can transfer and he can talk to you about that. But you can dissect current whole life and you can break down what percentage of it was insurance and paid up additions.

And then, most times my spouse’s case, she was, she got taken for one of these, but, she didn’t really the way the financial planning world works. They get a bunch of young salesmen to suck at their friends and family into these types of arrangements. What we did is we just cashed in her policy is what we did, but sometimes it might make sense.

Tyler can work with you guys to exchange it or whatnot. And I’ll say it a little bit differently. I think. Insurance has its purpose. And the purpose of life insurance is to protect your human life value. So I think that there is a purpose there, but as an investment or what we’re doing is totally opposite of that.

We’re utilizing it for the cash value component not the protection part of it. If it is purely the protection part, it is considered could be expensive. I’ll use a gentler word then a scam or something then lane. But yeah, I think it is traditional whole life is expensive.

There is a cheap coverage, which is term, but again, those, rarely ever pay out, but again, it’s there to protect your life or the what ifs. And this is a total different strategy. So that’s where people may get confused if they hear it. And I think we have someone on here or a later slide going over, maybe some of the chatter people may hear about whole life in general.

Yeah. And when I talk to some of you guys have made me talked to your whole life, financial planner, people, and most financial planners or people who make these things, they don’t get it. They don’t get us as investors. What do we want? We want liquidity so we can take the money out and invest it in much better deals.

But these other guys, they say we wanna give you. Higher returns. And we want the bigger death payout, that’s in their head, what they think life insurance should do, but we’re using this, we’re using life insurance. Yes. But really what I’m using it for is to get that tax loop pulse.

So I have to pay my taxes on it and I wanna get the liquidity. I wanna maximize liquidity and I’m willing to give up the death payout and the returns on the policy because it’s small. Anyway, it’s different than 5% to 5.5% returns on this stuff where, what I really want is the liquidity.

So I can go put it in something making 10, 15, 20%. And that’s the idea of a sophisticated investor. And that’s where these other guys, they just don’t get us. How we do things with our money and how we invest it in alternative assets.

Yeah. And this slide just kind of highlights. Lane touched on bank on life insurance. So life insurance, is a asset that a lot of corporations use including banks. So specifically it’s called a bully or bank home life insurance. But if you were to look on the bank’s assets, the list of assets you’ll see life insurance.

I think chat is able to pull this up and you’ll see highlighted down there, life insurance, but. Bank banks clearly understand life insurance, the risks associated with that. And they hold a lot of their assets in that also. That kind of was the proof in the pudding as far as how safe it is.

They’re also willing to lend against that. We’ll touch about a cash value line of credit. So you could take your policy to a bank, not all banks, there’s banks out there that will specifically give you a line of credit based on your cash value. And that to me is similar to a real estate.

They understand the asset and, but unlike real estate or HELOC where, your loan to value is more in the seven or 80% loan to value the banks will lend you 95 to a hundred percent loan to value on your cash value. That kind of says how secure and safe banks consider whole life insurance.

Yeah. It, and again, this goes back to, lot of my discoveries and like what the wealthy do, investing in alternative assets, getting off of wall street and putting their money into these life insurance products. You follow what the wealthy do, and they’re quietly doing something a little bit different as the same goals money talks, but 📍 wealth whispers, you.

Another example is like Walmart, Walmart will buy insurance policies and their top dogs and store it on their balance sheet, as they’re safe semi-liquid stores. What I tell a lot of people is I follow what the wealthy do, but also what the banks and what the big companies do.

And you take a hint from what they’re doing. This is a strategy that they’re employing and if you own a business it’s not a bad way of doing things. So different use cases again.

Yeah. It’s more than just the type of asset. So I think that one of the biggest key factors on the performance or the utilization of the strategy is the policy design. We’re using, we’re independent where we can write with multiple companies. We choose, certain companies, some for their flexibility and then also just how we can design it.

The product is the product. And, most people can utilize and design it the same way we just choose to design it. The most cash value efficient and flexible because that’s what appeals to us as investors. And our design is really caters towards investors because we are investors first and that’s how we want to utilize this strategy.

There’s other designs out there and it has its pros and cons or the different levers. So we, our main focus is cash value and flexibility. Yeah. And this is the portion of the show where Tyler’s gonna spearhead this next few slides, because this is somewhere, this is a time where I realized the strategy and started to employ it myself.

But then I realized how like more technical it gets and that’s where it required a engineer like Tyler to really learn this on behalf of you guys. If you guys look back in the coaching calls, which we keep in the members site, and we arrange everything, everyone from lower net worth to over, accredited beyond, we do, we talk about implementation speed and, maybe you wanna put 200 grand every year in this stuff or 50 grand a year.

You can see some of those examples. We can probably do that at the end. If there’s time here, but. This is some something where I had the self realization that I didn’t have the bandwidth to keep up on this stuff constantly. And, I need to focus on deals and finding, deal relationships out there.

I’ll vouch for Tyler. Tyler gets on flights, he goes to these infinite banking industry mastermind, again, events, and I forced them to do it because, I said, you gotta like really, you gotta get involved in this stuff, just like how I did with this other stuff.

And really transcend your average, keyboard, jockey insurance provider, who just happens to have a license or worse social media influencer. That’s, this stuff is a technical stuff and it needs to be tailor to each person. These are the ways we’ll get into designing the policy the right way.

Yeah. And touched about this In the previous slide, but the, as, in order to maintain the taxable treatment from the, in the IRS’s minds, there are some tax laws and unfortunately, the IRS got involved in the eighties, so they created something called a me limit.

Some people may hear that, or it’s a modified endowment contract, which really prevents pre 1980s people ready to dump in a whole bunch of money into a policy lump sum, very little insurance and really capitalize on the power of insurance. IRS has stepped in, in the eighties, they created a limit basically where it says, Hey, in order for this to the taxable the taxable treatment only will apply if it’s insurance and it, you really need to purchase a certain amount of insurance in relation to the amount that you’re stuffing in.

We maximize, we, we take that to the limit and so we’re able to stuff as much funds into the policy have as much cash value early on with also long-term growth, but with the flexibility while maintaining within those IRS rules and, these rules have changed and tightened over some time.

So that’s. , it, it is, we’ve had to stay on top of things. BA basically in the beginning of 2021 or the end of 2021 was when the new law took into effect also. So they’re changing and updating things, every couple years or so. But that’s where the design is really crucial in order to maximize those things.

Yeah. And this stuff isn’t getting any better. So like the best time to get a policy was yesterday, just like how it was to go into deals, the deals in 2018 kind of cashed out, that’s the best time to do it was yesterday. And it reminds me a lot of like real estate professional status, just like the way lavage changed.

There’s a great tax loophole. If you wanna use that word. guess for the real estate professional status, I think 10 years ago, a lot of what a lot of doctors were doing that were making, 500, $600,000, a million dollars a year was getting a little whimsical rental property.

And then now getting rep status and now using all the passive losses from their deals to drain their income down to, 300 or zero and not pay any taxes. And then the IRS is wait a minute, guys, this doesn’t seem right. So they implemented all these like rules for getting real estate professional status.

It’s the same thing. Tyler mentioned here for the life insurance before you could just write all this stuff off and all the returns would be tax free and, people would put like a dollar, the life insurance, and then the Iris was like, wait a minute, guys, there’s a limit to this. Like you can’t just put $1 and have the whole thing be tax free.

Cuz you can imagine if you guys are like, financial hackers like us, where that goes, put a gazillion dollar policy and put $1 in life insurance, whole thing tax free. So there’s a certain limit to that and where we get into this 90 10, this 10% insurance thing. That’s a little bit more historical context on we always try and stay one step ahead of, the latest, the, where the tax laws are and always be tax compliant.

Of course.

Yeah, so the, that meth limit that is a IRS limit there’s two main, large limits. It’s usually it’s the IRS limit or this meth limit. And the second one is just company limits. So that’s internal limits a company puts on and some constraints they put on. Again the choice of company is almost as important, but as far as the me limit that really, that, that limit is defined by your age, gender along with your health rating status.

So when when you go through the underwriting process, you get approved for a certain amount of death benefit based on your age, gender. And you’re given a health rating and of a better health rating will, will drive your death benefit up a little bit more. So then your me limit will also be slightly higher.

But yeah, the main factor is for a me limit is the amount you wanna stuff into a policy a year. And then the factors are your age, gender and health rating. And then the second limit is basically company limits. There’s various company limit. The big one that we focus on is the paid up additions or POA limitations.

Because the POAs are so beneficial for the cash value companies limit basically how much you can put in per year based in relation usually to your base premium. So that’s the cost and you can think of base premiums. The cost of insurance paid up additions as truly, the cash dump or the cash value addition and internal companies put internal limits as far as how we can design these.

And you might hear three times POAs, five times, POAs, 10 times POAs. The companies we use have 10 times POAs and that’s really beneficial as far as cash value growth. And, I think again, maybe in the back of your head you’re sharing, you know what Dave Ramsey said?

We all know Dave Ramsey, great guy. And I think he does a great job for teaching those, people, most people out there, 90, 95% of people who are in debt don’t make too much money. I think he means well, he’s said whole life insurance is a rip off and it’s cuz we mentioned at the top, it’s all how you configure.

I was watching some YouTube videos of the stuff last night and, trying to see the bad thing about a lot of this financial world is a lot of people, they just don’t really dig into it. And the secret isn’t how you create it and how you structure the whole encompassing strategy, where infinite banking is just one of ’em, this particular YouTube video the caller set mentioned a few things here, which I’ll highlight.

They said the break even point for his policy was year seven. Yeah, when you’re configuring this stuff with higher insurance, which you don’t, which where the commissions and fees come from, you’re gonna have a higher break even point. I don’t know, like some of the last policies you’ve been doing Tyler, but I’m pretty sure it’s a lot less than that.

And then he also mentioned the one thing I will agree with Dave on is he said, and I quote, when you work for the certified financial planners, the CFPs is he called them, they work for the Northwestern mutual guys, he just laughing and he says, those are the guys that just screw people every day.

So it wasn’t me who said it, anybody gets offended and mad at Northwestern mutual, any XYZ mutual company. He that’s what Dave Ramsey said. But again, we’re configuring this a little a lot differently with lot less insurance, which is where the fees and commissions come from. Again, I think this is where most people, and this is what kind of gets me with a lot of things.

Most people will just only read the headlines of videos or news clips. But when you actually read the damn article, the story is very different.

Yeah. And I think Dave Ramsey is also El alluding to that whole life is expensive. And I think traditional whole life, the way it’s designed it is very, it is expensive in relation to possibly O other things out there to protect your life such as term. But again, we’re doing it differently.

And the design, so this slide represents a little insight on as far as the design traditional whole life. So this is a 50 50 split. Traditional whole life would be more, hundred percent premium. So all of that would go to, the death benefit cost a 50, 50 design or 50% is the expense or death benefit or base premium 50% is paid up additions.

That paid up additions as mentioned earlier, really has reduced fees compared to the base premium. So in relation that $500 going to base premium. maybe a few dollars of that will show up as cash value. Whereas for POAs, 500 goes into POAs. There is a fee slight fee in there, but I would say 4 75 will actually show up in cash value.

So much, much drastic change. And that’s why we wanna really minimize our goal is to minimize the base premium and maximize the POAs. The next slide shows a 10 90 split. You may hear a 90, 10, 10 90. I think that’s all the same a lot of times. Some people put the PAA portion first in this slide, it has the base premium.

First I personally call it the 10 90 split where 10% goes to base premium. And a lot of times that is also a company limit. In relation to, the factor, you can put a hundred dollars in as base premium, again, maybe $1 or so of that will show up as cash value and then putting $900 into UAS and your cash value, would be 850 or so not quite 900, but drastically different.

So out pocket from, as the client, it’s the same thousand dollars coin out of your pocket, how it performs or where that money is going. Is very different based on the design. Again, same thousand dollars going out. If it was a traditional whole life, you probably have $0 cash value that 50, 50 you might have about $400 for four 50 cash value.

And then a 10 90 would you’d have, 800 or so cash value. It’s all just purely the design. And then that impacts your cash value portion. Yeah. So some people might say, oh, we’re already doing the infinite banking thing, but they could be in this format where they’re paying five times as much fees and commissions, and they’re getting five times less cash value than they should be getting with this 10 90 split.

Not all policies, still again, it’s do you read the headlines or you actually analyze what’s in the content here and how, or in this case, how it’s designed, right? You may be implementing I B C banking from yourself. But if again, like we, we kind of urge people if you’re already doing this strategy.

Just check out what the split was on the premiums versus the paid up editions. This is typically. What most people will do. Some people in our mastermind group they’ll do 70, 30 or 30, 70 splits. So like like a mix between the 50 50, which I don’t think you ever wanna do that. There’s some other advantages to doing it that way, I’d say, the first thing is like lowering the commissions and fees for you guys, which I’m sure the question comes up.

Like, why the heck would you and Tyler lower the fees and commissions, I guess I have my reasons which is then you put more money into deals and you actually have more money than paying out in fees and you invest more and you tell more of your friends about this type of stuff. But to me, it’s like most of our clients are doing really big policies.

So the commissions and fees are there for us that kind of keeps the lights on, but it’s, I’ve always thought of this as like an added service for our investors in our investor group. Certainly staying away from this 50 50 split. Yeah. And to not get into too much technical detail, but the design also enables a lot of flexibility.

So on a 10 90 split that a hundred dollars, even though your target amount in this case would be a thousand dollars. What you have to put in every year is really only the a hundred dollars that, that additional $900 in this case is flexible and optional. And that’s where, that’s how the design also plays into the flexibility.

So not only the company allows, the insurance company allows you that flexibility, but the design then again, allows you to put in capital as you have it, throughout the policy year versus having to save up and have that thousand dollars or in the 50, 50 design case $500, available on your premium anniversary.

That’s a, that also plays a big factor. For me personally, just having my, since I have most of my capital working, I don’t wanna sit around and, bank up the large payment and have that only be able to put in once a year. I like to spread it out over the year and dump it in.

We had a question here from Hillary. Does the me limit include the amount of premiums you pay a year or is the me limit the amount of additional PUA you can add to the policy? Yeah. Good question. Yeah, it’s it is a cumulative amount. So that me limit is the total amount of funds you can dump into your policy.

So that would include your, the premiums for that year.

So one unique way, a lot, some people, he struggle to hear how the PWAs really added add value to the policy. We came up with this scenario where it’s similar to a house cause most of us are investors. So think of the base premium as your debt servicing on your mortgage, right?

You’re, it’s something you have to pay in order to keep that asset yours very little value added if we’re talking the debt servicing portion of your mortgage, but that’s what you have to pay paid up. Additions would be more like if you were to do a renovation to your house, there’s some expenses to it.

But a lot of times it increases the value of her house, to the more than what are equal to, or more than what you put in as far as repairs. So paid up additions would be similar, like a renovation blue seeing the value of that house, which later then you have you, you boosted up your equity.

So you can have access to that. Or when you sell that you make more of a profit base premium equals the debt, servicing on a mortgage, very something you have to pay very little value add to, to, to the asset. And we had a question from Luke here. So if you take a loan against your infinite banking policy, as it grows, can the growth pay back to the loan?

Yeah. So paying back the loan, you can, you, you could either pay that out of pocket or as you mentioned the policy grows, it’ll just, it’ll take it from the cash value component or, it’ll take it from your policy to pay that debt servicing if you didn’t pay it that year. Yeah. So I guess the kind of the similar thing is again, think about it like a HELOC right.

You can take loans from your HELOC. But I think where a lot of people, they get it mixed up or they have this false sense of needing to pay off that debt. And we get this question a lot, right? I have a hundred

thousand dollars, I took a hundred thousand dollars outta my HELOC to go into this deal.

I’m paying 5%, I think what is that $5,000 a year on that? And they think most of us on the call today, we all pay off our credit card, we pay off our debts, but it’s not like you have to really pay it off. Just like your Helo, right? Yes you do. But then again, if you’re making 10, 15, 20% on this.

Then just let that 5% roll. And that’s what the big companies do. That’s what businesses do. If they’re making money somewhere else where it’s just an arbitrage game and in a HELOC, that’s where you would just let that line of credit revolve and in, in an infinite banking, same situation there.

And answer Luke’s question, just like in the HELOC you’re taking a policy, your HELOC loan from it. Your house is gonna continue go up in value the asset and in this infinite banking world, same thing same kind of phenomenon is happening. But again, like the HELOC is cool, cuz it gets people started and it’s easy to tap that equity.

But at some point you draw the limits of that policy because the banks always play these BS games, which you guys on sandbagging you on the appraisals and giving you worse loan, the values, especially if you’re here in Hawaii, you get these teaser rates and then goes up after that. And then the banks can always pull your helos on you where the infinite banking it’s yours, that’s why the term comes banking from yourself. But you also get the added asset protection, the being life insurance, which you don’t really get with the, he. If you’re one of those high income earners or like a high liability profession, like a doctor, that kind of means a lot to you guys.

All right. Yeah. And I do see a lot of questions about the policy loans. So I’ll try to cover that on this slide, but the, there, there is a way of, so how you access the cash value is through a loan and we’ll touch a policy loan. And then we’ll briefly touch what a cash value line of credit.

So those are the two main ways. So a policy loan, literally there’s no what you’re putting up as collateral is really your death benefit. So going through a policy loan the insurance company knows that you have the death benefit. They know at some point you will die. So what they’re doing is they’re, collateralizing your death benefit.

So your death benefit overall stays the same, but your net death benefit which would mean if you pass away, if you had any outstanding loans the outstanding loan will get subtracted from your death benefit, and then the net death, the net would get transferred to your beneficiary.

There’s really no approval process. As long as you have that cash value in your policy. It’s usually about a two business day process where you go online and you request it. California residents, they do need to print it out, what, sign it and email it in. So it’s a little bit more difficult, but again, very simple same time turnaround as, as far as two business days.

But in, in some companies and they show it slightly different cash value. Norm technically stays the same. Your net cash value may go down or in this case, your available cash value. But for one, for one company we use a lot is guardian. So on guardian, whenever you take a loan out on the portal, you’ll see your cash value actually just remain the same, your net your death benefit.

You’ll see, go down because that’s your net death benefit in regards to how much that can you access. So we like to tell people, if you see your cash value, you can access 95% of that via policy loan. The company, the, your basically paying up front, the ins interest owed till your next policy anniversary date.

So they’re precalculating that based on your loan size. And then they’re holding some reserves to cover that, that one year of debt servicing. You don’t have access to a hundred percent of your cash value especially if you’re doing it early on in your policy or as you get closer to your next anniversary because there’s less.

Reserve required you’ll have access to greater than 95%. But we just use that as a guideline 95% of your cash value. There is another question from Dave about, what happens in the end if you keep if you only ended up with a 10% year after year, because you keep kept on pulling out, but basically 90% of the loan.

When you do take a policy loan, similar to a HELOC versus on a house, the policy continues to grow the whole amount. Once you put your funds in there, it continues to grow that the growth rate might be slightly affected based on the company. And if it’s direct or non-direct recognition, but the policy continues to grow similar to your house.

The, your house continues to grow, whether you have a mortgage or HELOC out on in, and that helps to offset the debt servicing costs. But the main benefit for us as investors accessing the funds is, we’re gonna go put it into a asset or an investment. And a lot of times the, that asset cash flows is what helps to pit on that debt servicing while your policy as a whole continues to grow.

Yeah. And. And, it is sometimes conceptually hard to see that. Get with us, we can do what we call illustrations, where we simulate, Hey, what if I take a loan out every year and either not pay the interest or pay the interest out of pocket or have the policy pay the interest. But we can show the illustrations to project and see, Hey, how will this perform?

What if scenarios or, just for planning purposes. Yeah. And that’s all, I’ll tell you, go talk to Tyler about that stuff. Like the direct recognition. I still don’t understand that stuff. And I think that’s where you partner with Tyler and then, he’s the guy you call when you have those kinds of questions or, if you did pass away, that sad event where you’re worth more to your spouse, then you are, cuz that’s pay out somebody to call, who’s a real life person. Who’s your in between the big life insurance company. I think that’s the value that Tyler provides, but getting a little bit more and we’re illustrating what this whole policy, what this infinite banking thing.

This is a screenshot of a video I did for folks. And a lot of this is in the e-course did you guys go to. Members that simple passive cash flow.com. You guys should have all access to the eCourse, which goes into a lot more in depth that what we talked about, what we’re talking about today, but there’s this video in here where I’m balancing, you can get multiple policies, you can layer them on top of each other, which is a strategy that I recommend.

So you implement at different speeds, but this is a little tracker sheet that I personally made to keep track of. Here I have little policies, right? Where they’re from. The CV is cash value, right? This is how much I money to tap into. And then I might have some loans out at a certain percentage.

So this is my little dashboard just a simple spreadsheet of how one might keep track of this stuff. And then, your future payments that you’ve gotta make in the future. We’ll get into this a little bit later, but like when you configure this with a 90, 10 split only have to do 10% of the commitment money.

And this is the game changer folks, right? If it was 50% then, so you got to put in five times as much money. So if money gets short and you don’t have to really fund this, the policy can won’t collapse or cave in like a black hole. Especially when you could figure what that 90 10, like how we.

But, I use this to keep track of my, 20, 22, 20 23 premiums and PUA paid up additions. That’s what that means here. But the way I’m using this as an investor, this is more, the practical usage of this thing is all right. I’m going into deals, right? I’m gonna put a hundred grand in this deal, a hundred grand in that deal.

And I’m looking for more deals based on here. I’ve got several hundred thousand dollars to tap for some deals, or maybe I wanna put in some hard money and then maybe I get the hard money back and I gotta replenish my infinite banking so I can keep making my return there. This is how one might use this.

This the end game of probably using this product. And, for a lot of people getting a million or $2 million in here and just socking it away might be a good end game strategy. But it’s just really nice to know that you have a large sum cash that you can get at an emerging, especially for you business owners.

This is where I keep a lot of my cash stores. So when deals, if a deal were to struggle, I pull out a big sum of money and put it in there because I’m, I’m not gonna have a capital call. I’m gonna make every like personal thing I can do to make, prevent that from happening for you guys.

But this is where the money is coming from. it’s coming from my infinite banking. So I’ll just call up. Actually I’m old still. So I call up the insurance company and do my loans whenever I want to. But as Tyler said, you can just get on your computer dashboard and have it direct deposited.

One funny thing that I learned is if you, at some point you start to get policies and your spouse, cuz if you’re married to a female, they typically live longer. So the pricing is a little bit better for them, but it gave me a hard time. can I get a policy loan from my spouse’s policy?

Probably because 50% of people get divorced and they maybe they raid their spouse’s in front of banking policy. That’s just opening up the whole idea of not only getting the policies on you, but your spouse. And so people will also get on their kids too. But there’s a lot more of this content in the e-course and then when you become a client additional material gets unlocked, but we wanted to keep that separate from you guys coming in.

It’s not in your guys’ portals now, but we thought it might just confuse people, but there’s a lot of these other techniques that people, in the film are doing and investors that, really comes alive when you start to come to the retreat and you start to mix it up with other accredited investors.

These guys come with all kinds of stuff. Yeah. And one thing we didn’t highlight, so policy loans you are totally in control of that. There’s no monthly statement that comes in says, Hey, you owe this much interest that is truly up to you. As far as if for when you pay that back.

We always recommend paying the debt servicing what happens is, we, they, precalculate the debt of interest owed up to your policy anniversary date. If you don’t make that interest payment, the interest will then get tapped onto your loan principle at the, on your policy anniversary. So prior to that, it’s calculated simple interest.

We like to keep it simple interest. So we pay the debt servicing prior to your policy anniversary date while your policy continues to grow compounding. So that’s also some of the magic there. Yeah. I personally don’t really, I try and keep it stupid for myself or keep it simple, stupid for myself, the kiss format.

I just, once you get past the first year, you’ve paid your 10%, which is all you really need to fund this thing without it collapsing your caving in which is again, why the 10% insurance Is a game changer compared to how most people will configure this with 30% or 50% where you have to put a lot more of money into it.

So it doesn’t collapse. So I don’t really freak out whether it’s, I’m not paying I’m Def like, like Tyler said, like I don’t really pay the policies down unless I don’t have the money and I don’t really worry about, paying off the interest. I just let the cash value pay it automatically.

So I don’t really, I don’t really worry about it, but that’s just how I use my I C everybody’s a little bit different. This is an example of, you have a hundred thousand dollars cash value. What you have available for a loan would be about 95% of that. But in this sense we’re taking a lower loan to value.

So 60,000 simple interest loan, when you take that 60,000 loan, the a hundred thousand continues to earn, and, there’s various dividend rates. And whenever you hear any company announced their dividend rate, that’s a gross dividend rate. What historically what we’re seeing is about four or 5% IRR.

In this lower interest environment, we might see more three and a half to four and a half percent IRR. But in this case I think it’s illustrated showing a 4% IRR. So that hundred thousand dollars policy would grow by about 4,000 that’s $60,000 loan. You have four or five five 6% loan. And again, that’s te technically on the higher side would be $3,000 in debt servicing.

You can, you’re able to take that 60,000 then invested in a asset that asset, even if it’s 6% cash flowing asset cash flows 3,600 a year, that by itself would be enough to pay for the debt servicing. So you have some positive cash flow from the asset, along with the policy still growing. And that’s the beauty combined, it’s better off than just doing one of the assets by itself.

And I wanna emphasize, we were talking a lot about the design and the whole life product. That’s just one aspect, right? The whole banking system is the flow of money. So it really is accessing that cash value to have it work outside of the policy also. So that in, at the end, you have your policy grow.

But you also have assets outside of the policy growing. So your net worth is combined is better than just putting it in the policy and just leaving there that still grows and works, but the true magic is accessing it and growing outside of the policy. So just wanna really highlight that cause that’s where a lot of people, are either debt, aver.

They don’t want to take on any debt, if you take on good strategic debt, then you can really maximize your growth. And that’s what this strategy really helps you to do. Yeah. And this is where most of the life insurance guys don’t really get it, they’re like don’t, you wanna make a higher, I can give you a higher return in this policy than the four, 5%.

But we give up the liquidity and as investors, we want liquidity. So we can take that liquidity and go invest it in an apartment deal or a fixed and Flatt or some other maybe venture capital, right? Whatever you guys like to do. Personally, I like to go put my money in stabilize real estate that I could make maybe a 15% return.

And there’s that Delta, right? 15 minus the 5% that I pay, that’s that Delta and that’s an arbitrage game, but I’m still having my underlying asset, which is the life insurance policy. Grow. So it’s there’s that this is the, where the whole idea of where you’re making money in two places or money is growing in two places.

Yeah. And I, or, sorry the other thing too is, you may hear people call it the, an asset or the dual asset. Cause it truly is that it’s not a, or a lot of people when they’re, when they talk to us, they’re saying I’m trying to do this deal. So I don’t have the funds to do a policy.

It really is a, it’s a compliment to each other. So you could do both, right? Granted you’re gonna lose some liquidity or one, but in the long run that’ll pay off. But it shouldn’t be looked at, you have to do one or the other, it really should be looked at, you can do both. So you would put the funds into the policy first and then access those funds to do the deal.

And the first year is obviously where all the expenses or most of the expenses are taken out of. And that’s where you’re gonna feel the biggest hit, but we’re able to design and tweak some things. So even from year two, definitely at year three, most people will see it as truly a deposit. So when they put that a hundred thousand into their policy, that would have access to a hundred thousand.

Year three, year four and even more as the policy ages. So that’s where, I mean takes some time to really see that benefit, but like any, anything, you need to capitalize it for a little while and then it’ll pay off in, in the long run. And in, in this case, we’re talking you’ll two to three years and then you’ll see the great benefits, down further down the line.

Yeah. And maybe it clicked for you at that point, you’re making money in two places and, so what some people will do, over a million dollar net worth, maybe they have a lot of money in their home equity, even half a million, that’s where maybe they might wanna do 200, $250,000 a year.

And then you can do strategies, maybe get with Tyler, like depending on where your birthday is, this is what I did to kickstart my per mine is I doubled up, like I was able to, back fund for the previous year and then the next year, all right away. So I could fund it, put my liquidity in there and then the next day, get it into the next several deals that came up.

That’s really what we’re talking about. That’s the strategy where we’re coning it with investing in real estate or other business furniture.

Alright. Just some, there was a lot of questions on policy loan rates. Again, this is, as there’s a lot of fluctuation, but for policy loan rates and if it’s fixed and it varies from company to company. And I’ll say guardian is one of the main companies we use. Guardian is a fixed interest rate.

What you’ll feel is a 4.76. So that could be that will be the fixed interest rate for the life of the policy. If it’s variable, then that, that variable interest rate is usually tied to the moody, triple a bond index, the corporate bond index rate. There usually is a floor. So a lot of companies now have a floor of 3% around.

But then that’ll it can vary. And what the company will do is they’ll announce it every year, what their variable rate is. And it’ll, it can’t fluctuate more than half a percent per year. So even though like right now, the interest rate shot. A lot of the variable interest rate company or for the companies that have variable interest rates, they’re only increasing it half a percent a year.

It has no limit on how much it drops. For me personally, I like the fixed rate because we’re utilizing the strategy for long term planning for the stability. I just I like that. I wouldn’t wanna have a variable and the unknowns down the line, but there are those options.

Now we’re not gonna go too much into this strategy, but this is just a, like a preview of, the different advanced strategies that some of our members will do with our policies. As Tyler mentioned, you can get a loan from your life insurance company, and that’s the easy way.

That’s what I do. It’s the easiest thing to call them up or, get a policy loan from them at their, what about 5% rate. But, as most of our financial hackers in our group, they always like to optimize things and they found that they can go to these third party banks that will give them loans on the cash value in their life insurance policy.

Around like the three and a half, 4% range. So they’re making an additional 1% doesn’t sound like a lot, but, they could be saving maybe 20% in interest. Of course like the bigger the policy. And this is what I tell my guys. It’s man, you guys to spend a lot of time on these trade line things, these little things that kind of, moved, it’s moved the needle slightly, but then again, thinking back to when, I was just barely in a greater investor, like this wealth building, journey, it’s all about a game of inches, like kinda like football, those are the things that are gonna get you that momentum forward and eventually push you to that hockey stick of growth where maybe I’m in that stage personally.

And I don’t really, I value my time more than money, if you’re somebody who’s still growing your net worth, these are the kinds of strategies that you could employ by even by getting a lower rate on your loans to increase that Delta between what you invested in and get and what you’re paying your policy loans at.

But again, a lot of this stuff will be in the E course unlock for clients. All right. This is just an example of a typical policy we would do. This is for a 50 year old male with a preferred non tobacco health rating, which is, or, sorry, this actually is a 45 year old male at a preferred non tobacco health rating. The guardian is, we are independent.

We mainly write for mass mutual and guardian. Most of the policies write for investors and including myself is with guardian and that’s because they offer the greatest P wave flexibility. So this specific design is a 50,000 target amount and a funding duration of seven years with this specific design and product the kind of the sweet spot would be between five and 15 years or so of funding duration.

And there’s various reasons why people would choose shorter funding period or longer funding period that, we would go over their goals during a call in this case. It’s a seven year funding period looking on the left of the annual premium breakdown. So this is where that $50,000 target amount, the base premium is really only 45, 46.

So that is what we would call the cost of insurance. Commissions are based off of that. So by shrinking down that number to the smallest we can, and this is basically the smallest number we can based on the 50,000, this is a company limit. That we we’re shrinking that down. We’re really shrinking down the expenses and commissions, therefore, really boosting up the cash value to you as a client, but that 45 46 buys a certain amount of whole life.

That’s $190,000 of whole life death benefit, but in order to stay within that me limits and the IRS limits that $50,000 target amount, you need $985,000 of death benefit. So because you only have 190 of whole life, the cheapest way to boost your death benefit up to that amount is the use of one year term.

So you’ll see this other number $478 and 86 cents. That’s the paid up additions rider scheduled. So that’s so that you can add UAS to the policy, but embedded in there is this $402 and 14 cents of O I T. And that’s one year term. So that one year term is buying an additional, $794,000. So combining that with the whole life death benefit, that’s how you’re getting up to that required death benefit and then allows you to stuff in 50,000 total.

So what would be due on your premium anniversary date or initially to put this in is the sum of 45 46. 478. So that’s, $5,025 is basically an or about 10% is what would be due. And that’s basically all ex insurance expenses and costs, but then that 44,975 that’s paid up additions, unscheduled. So that’s the cash dump.

That’s the flexible portion that you can put in as you please throughout the year. Now there’s a question out there. What if you don’t max fund it that year or the flexibility of it, especially with guardian, not only within the year, you can dump money in as you please up to your target amount or your me limit.

If you don’t reach that amount the remaining amount will roll over to the next year. So say 50,000 year one you dumped in 50,000 year two, you only dumped in 10,000, that extra 40,000 of space will roll over to year three. So year three, you would be able to catch up that missed 40,000. So you could dump in 40,000 in addition to the 50,000.

So you could then catch up a whole 90,000 in year three and make that policy whole. So you don’t really lose the ability to dump your POAs in as long as it’s within your funding duration. So within that seven years, as long as you make your catch up payments within that seven years, then you can do that as you please outside of that seven years guardian in this case, and all insurance companies will require you to go through additional underwriting to qualify again that, Hey, why are you dumping in this large amount?

It did some health. Did you get some health scare or something happen that you’re dumping a lot of this money into your policy? So that’s where the funding duration can come into play. And that’s why, longer funding durations allow greater flexibility. It does require more insurance products.

So there is slightly more expenses, but that’s where we, on our call, we can model out different scenarios. So you can see what best fits for you. Some of the key things that we, the metrics that we like to look at is how much cash value do you have early on and this design maximizes that cash value.

So you look at that column, the net cash value. So dumping in 50,000, year one, you would have $41,735 of cash value. That’s about, little over 83%. So when people ask us, what is the expense of, what is the cost of starting this policy? That is one cost. What I like to tell people you’re gonna lose about 20% liquidity, in year one.

You’re 50,000 you’ll have access to about 40,000 via policy loan. However, in year two, if you’re to dump in 50,000 you’ll see the cash value go up at the end of the year by about 49,000 and change. So still some hit, but way less of a hit as most of the expenses are front loaded.

And then you’re three, if you’re to dump in 50,000, that’s where a lot of people have that shift in mentality from, Hey, this is an expense or premium. I have to pay to more, truly a deposit where they’re putting in 50,000, what shows up in cash value is 50,000. And then every year after that, it just gets more and more, so that’s where also, the funding we can play around with the funding duration because in the later years, including myself, we start looking forward to when can I dump in more cash, more funds into the policy and boost up the cash value even more , that’s that one metric of cash value, then the break even point is another one.

So the break even point in the sense of the amount of cash value you have versus your total outlet when does that break even, and in this case is breaking even between years five and six. So you’ll see, at year five at the, you put in 250,000, you have 249,934. Again, these are projections based on the current dividend rate.

This is assuming, 5.65 gross dividend rate is what this illustration assumes. That dividend rate is not guaranteed. Dividends are pretty likely to happen. As lane mentioned, guardian specifically has been around for 162 years. They’ve paid a dividend for 162 years through, consistently the amount of dividends have fluctuated.

We are historically in a low interest and dividend environment, 5.65. But and we would expect it to possibly remain low interest rates are increasing. So possibly, we’ll see a rise in dividend rates, but this illustration assumes 5.65 gross dividend rate. Every year, there are some tweaks we can do with the design, that possibly pulls that a year ahead.

So breaking even maybe between years four and five, even that liquidity as far as 83% year one, there’s, it there’s some tweaks we could do based on your situation that maybe we can get that as high as 87, maybe 88% liquidity in year one. If you have capital available and able to jumpstart the policy, basically the, so my understanding of this sheet of numbers, and this is the, this is what’s called an illustration.

So this is what Tyler when you guys meet and you guys get illustration, this is what pops up and is given. I don’t really understand all these numbers, but I personally look at is, the net cash value as a percentage to what you put in, like Tyler said, you, when you configure like how we do, typically you’re running away with something better.

You’re losing less than 20% your first year. I know. My first policy I did who, who was taking a lot more in commissions before I found Tyler it was like, Double that or double the loss basically. That’s your little quick tip on comparing these policies. And then, another good exercise is that, it might be a loss of 20% here the first year, but then you start to recruit it by year three.

It might be half of that. 90, 92% is what you get. But then, like Tyler said, like the break even point is always a quick way to compare policies and ultimately how much fees cuz these life insurance policies, they’re commodities at the end of the day, they’re all underwritten and done by the same top tier companies.

Now I’ll mention there are other, some like lower tier companies that you wouldn’t even wanna mess with. In my opinion, you might get a little bit better, but I just don’t think it’s worth it when you know, the whole purpose of you doing this is security and asurity that’s that net cash value.

That’s how you evaluate the break even point. And again like that, most people doing these policies it’ll break even at year seven, you’re eight at best, but obviously, when you ran this number little after your five. Yeah. And you’ll see on that left the premiums go to zero.

So from year eight on, when we’re designing this for a seven year funding, you, we ex you’d exercise the option where at year eight, you’re converting this pre the policy to a paid up policy. So by, by doing so, no more premiums are due. That’s the good thing. The bad thing is then you can’t contribute, you can’t stuff in any more funds or POAs also.

Again the that’s where we can play around with the funding duration. Some knocks on the, this 10 90 design is that, Hey, we wanna fund this for long term. That’s where maybe we would choose a different company that has a different flexibility, but again you’ll be giving up some of that year to year.

Flexibility that guardian specifically is to me the benefit of that is not having to dump in 50,000 on your policy anniversary date, every year you have that flexibility throughout the year. It rolls over and things of that sort as lane mentioned other companies, and I think we cover that maybe in a later slides are all companies the same.

And we, I can go over some of the basic differences there. Did you get a next question? I think that was it right? Yeah. So we are independent. I would say ma the majority of the companies we use majority of the policies you write is for mass mutual or guardian.

Mass mutual has a different flexibility and that’s in the funding duration, but that’s where that the, that company the P way of flexibility is not as great. So the funding duration, they have a lot of flexibility in that. So we don’t have to necessarily determine the funding duration up front.

Whereas with guardian, we’re saying, Hey, this is a seven year design or a 10 or a 15 year design with mass. You don’t have to set that. It could be a five year design, or it could be a 30 year design. However, it’s best suited that you have that 50,000 it’ll dump in every year on that policy anniversary date.

So not too conducive for investors in the sense where most of our capital, we don’t wanna have it tied up and building up and have to put in 50,000 on that, on, within a few weeks, every year early. So you can’t contribute, but that’s another option with mass mutual. Yeah. And just Tyler says, uses the word flexibility.

The way I look at that word is I have three policies, emeritus, pan, and guardian. So what I don’t like about my emeritus is exactly what Tyler’s talking about, which is the the flexibility. I gotta like fund that thing every single year or something like that on the policy. And I think at Penn, I have to do it every other year.

I’m probably butchering this, that’s what it means by flexibility. Whereas guardian, I don’t really have to do that. Tyler tell me, yeah, 10% like this design it’s the 5,000 a year is what you’ll be putting in for a $50,000 design. And the 45,000 is truly flexible and you won’t lose the ability to put in that 45,000 if say you skip two or three years it’ll just bank up and then you’ll be able to make that catch up at the very end.

Yeah. And going over Annette’s other question in this illustration is the policy paid up after seven years and no more premiums need to be put in. I can already tell Annette’s already doing something like this, like this is the, I think this is the downside of the 90 10 arrangement because the 90 10 is great for new people, stuffing a whole bunch of money in here, right?

There’s a deal. You’ve got two, 300 grand, you just throw it into the policy and then you take 180 200 grand and put it into the next deal. That’s ideally what, the 90 10 it’s kinda like the launch pad, the quick start plan. But what I, what I tell most folks is yeah, do the 90 10 get started, get. A hundred, few hundred thousand dollars of cash value loaded up in there and just get that. You might take the money out the next day and put it into deals and that’s great. That’s exactly what you should be doing, in the long run, as in, that’s looting to shoot, as you near end game, right?

And it’s not necessarily how old you are to me, it’s where your net worth is when your net worth starts to go around four, 5 million net worth or even two and a half. If you guys are more frugal out there, you start to be seeing this infinite banking policies as end game for you to where you can make 5% tax free with very little to no volatility.

Then you’re maybe looking for more of a long term place to just store money as deals, cash out. You don’t go into more deals. You just put it into your life insurance and have it grow under your umbrella. That’s I think where, some of the members who are already in that end game stage might be one to that 70, 30 split. Is that right? Tyler? That’s my understanding of it. Yeah. I’m a strong believer in the 10 90 for all situations. I outlet. There’s some questions on here about so main mentioned, there are no deals. In life insurance. That is a very true statement. I know we’re talking a lot about the different companies, maybe different products.

The statement, there are no deals in life insurance is. Yeah. If you look across the board through all the strong mutual companies the product themselves, I think will vary very little in actual performance. Now, illustrations is one thing, actual performance, historically, I think and we’re talking the four mutual, large mutual companies, which is like New York life, Northwestern, guardian, mass mutual, all of those have all fluctuated basically would be performed the same way in, in actual performance.

What I feel is the differences with the companies is some of the nuances, it might be the PWA flexibility or the funding duration, flexibility the portal use, the ability to just go in and do things online on the portal the ease of the portal I’ll throw Penn mutual in there also, cause I think that’s an up and coming company that has been you know, making a strong move historically though that the, the The actual performance hasn’t and there’s not a lot of transparency there from the company itself.

I think they are performing icy. So I think that’s one other company that may get added as far as a very strong mutual insurance company in the future. Some of the trade offs with the, do the 10 90 split or the 90 10 split for me the one downside is that for the way we’re doing it with guardian is the funding duration limitation.

This maxes out because you priest premium is so small there’s a racial on the amount of death benefit you can get towards this 45 46, or really in this case, 190,000 of death benefit. So I can’t, we can’t push the death benefit, say to two mil based off of this 190,000 of whole life death benefits.

So it ma it, it limits that part where you can’t do this, you’d start have to paying a little bit more premiums but it also limits you on, 15 years, 16 years max, maybe for 50,000 design that you would wanna fund this towards now, I personally view, 16, 15 or 16 years as a pretty long funding period.

The true IBC practitioners or Nelson Nash, you’ll hear that you wanna fund this thing forever. I personally feel well you would open up additional policies. As long as you have, you are insurable. If you’re not insurable someone within your family or within your business, you would have an insurable interest for.

So that’s the one major downside you may hear on the downside is the dividends are less because it gets, PUA gets treated different than base premiums and so forth. But from all of the case studies we’ve seen is that overall, even though your dividends may be less, your overall cash value is more.

And that’s really what we care about is the cash value component of it, of the way we’re designing it. We haven’t been able to find one where overall performance, as far as cash value wise is impacted versus say a 30, 70, or a 40 60 design. Because even though on those other designs, the dividends are higher.

The overall net cash value is AC is still less because of the added expenses built in there. Yeah. And I think we’re getting out the scope of the infinite banking today. I think a lot of the people are, that question is alluding to what do I do an end game in my opinion, end game, like IOLs and these putting a whole bunch of money in here, like we’re talking over a few million dollars in life.

Insurance is a little overkill to me. Yeah, you might not be in value, add real estate, but you’re at least in like triple nets and you’re still in real estate. And that’s why the way for most of the people listening here, you guys are sophisticated investors. You guys aren’t like the average, Joe, just throwing a whole bunch of money in life insurance in end game, you’re still making, doing better than 5% if you want 5% cool. If all you need is a hundred thousand dollars, a passive income a year. Cool. But I think most of us in a retirement and end game, we all want, $20,000 of cash flow every month. You’re getting a lot of money in life insurance.

So that’s why I, like with Tyler this kind of goes into more end game financial planning, this is maybe we’ll answer questions at the end of this, to me there’s other investment options other than what we’re talking about for.

That lower risk, lower return, like I said, triple nets, maybe going back into the traditional investment market. The kind of we gotta get through some of these last slides here whole life versus term life term life, the reason for that is to protect you against somebody prematurely dying, whether you it’s, your spouse and your family is left out.

That’s the purpose of term life. And I think everybody should have that at least to cover, at least a million or $2 million. But that’s cheap typically. And a lot of times that’s, in your employment, your employer will cover some portion of that already. So I think that’s two separate things, right?

Again, we’re just using this whole life product to get this infinite banking, building this asset, making money in two places at one time. But when you start to fund larger policies like a hundred grand a year, $250,000 a year, it’s a byproduct of the term life. So a lot of the clients just turn off their term life because they already have it at this point.

And then a, quick discussion on IOLs iOS is like the third portion here we don’t use. IOLs are typically for higher returns, but you give up the liquidity. And typically I would be careful everybody, anybody selling IOLs, they’re typically very high commission products and the it’s a very multi-level marketing kind of a program.

What I’ve seen out there, they get you to, they get everybody to sign up for these Training programs where you can sell life insurance to your friends and families and suckers. And, I would just stay away from the IUL. There is a certain tool for it in the end game, if you just wanted to make 6%, but to me, for the people listening to this webinar today, you guys can do better than that.

IUL is investing for the clueless, for it’s like when, you build up four, five, $10 million plus in your kids and your kids’ kids to take over that money. That’s what they invest in because they don’t have a clue. They don’t have a network of what to invest in.

So that’s, to me what the IUL tool is for, but Maybe Tyler, can you go over like the mutual insurance company, stock insurance company differences real quick. Sure. And I’ll just add a little bit about the IUL. I actually bought IUL. That was my very first policy. That’s what sent me down also this rabbit hole of researching because it didn’t really perform to what I wanted to do now, again, with IUL similar to whole life, there’s a lot of design features in there.

So it probably wasn’t the most or best design, but why I personally don’t like IOLs is the underlying product of IUL is term life is renewable term. Unlike the guarantees of whole life where, it’s a set premium those expenses can be managed with renewable term. Basically you’re buying a new insurance product every year.

And although the numbers and the returns may look great as you’re young, similar with like level term is cheap. When you’re younger, It’s ridiculous when you’re older. If in your seventies or eighties, if you’re having that premium renew every year that’s a large expense and a very unknown cost that I’m not personally willing to utilize this strategy for.

That’s my take on IOLs. There is a question. Can you convert it into an I B C there is something where with all insurance, you can do a 10 35 where you take the cash value of one policy, turn it into another PO or roll it into another policy. Sometimes that makes sense.

Not, I wouldn’t say it, blanketly, it, it always makes sense, but there’s times when we don’t recommend it, or we’re just trying to, would recommend people how to maximize what they already have and not roll it over because there are some expenses, you’re starting over, but there is something called a 10 35 where you’re rolling over the cash value to a new policy.

Are all companies the same? We touched a briefed on this, but what we particularly choose and what we recommend is a mutual insurance company. And, the mutual part is key because that’s where you, as a policy holder are basically owners of the company. There’s no stockholders or anything.

A stock insurance company say Prudential has stockholders. So their vested interests maybe split, right? It’s not purely about the policy holders. They have stockholders that they have to appease as a mutual insurance company with and participating mutual insurance company.

That’s where the company profits are returned to you in the form of dividends. So that’s where, you’ll be receiving dividends from the mutual insurance company. We like, the, we like to play with the large ones. Lane mentioned, there are some smaller ones, some of those limits that we talked about, maybe a lot.

Less restrictive on some of these smaller companies. There’s usually a reason for that, that they wanna, they’re trying to build up, they wanna attract people. So maybe that 10 times P limit maybe 15 or so, or it may be, you could do like a 90 or 5 95 split on a policy. But there’s high risk.

I think with, smaller companies, the unproven track records. I don’t, I wouldn’t wanna utilize a long term strategy with some of the smaller companies. That, that’s where again the strategy is more for stability and for long term planning and I prefer to use proven large companies.

Yeah. And trust me guys, I get approach of all kinds of stuff these days. And like insurance companies show Puerto Rico that supposedly can get you around some tax things and all that type of stuff. Like to me, like you’re not like this infinite banking thing is what, like everybody should do. Everybody should be flowing your money through your infinite policy.

So you can be growing that asset there and then taking out in an invest it right. And make way more money there. That’s the one, two step program to make a little bit more on the, on this banking side. Taking on a lot more risks is just not worth it guys like that’s, I don’t know. I don’t, I just don’t think that’s Wises.

Yeah. And this is another question we get asked a lot. Is, am I too old to, to start this? Or would this strategy benefit me? I’ve had, I have some 60 year old clients 70 year old, maybe pushing it, but again, we can we can run some scenarios and see if it makes sense. The, again, because we’re using insurance, I think the largest determining factor would be being able to qualify.

The age itself, isn’t really the factor. It’s health conditions. Even whether you’re 70 or 40, the health conditions usually is the factor on being able to utilize a strategy, if it makes sense. The biggest thing, a 20 year old versus a 60 year old, if you look at the illustration the biggest difference you’ll see is the amount of death benefit.

So say for that 40 thou $50,000 policy, it’s around $900,000 of death benefit for a 20 year old, it might be like 1.3 mil for a 60 year old. It might be 500,000 for that same $50,000 target. So that’s one obvious difference. Again, we’re not designing it for the death benefit, but that’s one obvious difference as far as the cash value performance.

Surprisingly, it’ll be pretty similar between the different ages. The biggest difference is when you look further down, because this is a long term strategy where, you know, compounding really is impacted later down the year or down the line a 20 year old has theoretically about 60 plus years of compounding a 60 year old or a 70 year old may only have 20 or 10 years of compounding.

And it’s on that back end when you really see these huge gains. So early on it’ll probably perform the same. It might, instead of breaking, even between years five and six, it might break even between years, six and seven for someone, a lot older. But it’s really what you lose out on the back end.

Compounding, at the end of the day, it’s not configured off, like we’re not doing it for the death payout guys. That’s what term life is for. This is just mainly to get an asset that grows in two places. If you can’t qualify. Maybe you’ve got younger kids, you can buy a policy on them.

We’ve had some people, people who are in their seventies buy it on their 30 year old kids who, that’s where you dump all your money to. And it sounds counterintuitive because you think you’re getting a life and policy on your LF, but then again, you aren’t right. You’re just buying an asset and stuffing money into it is what we’re doing here.

And then I’ll caveat this slide that we, we, you would definitely need to consult your tax professional. We’re not CPAs, but you’ve heard the term me and the modified endowment contract. So if you were to cause the insurance product to become a me, then anything you do from there on forward would be taxed.

So even a policy loan take out distribution a, any of that would be, will be taxed. So that’s why by far you, we wanna prevent that from becoming me. There is maybe a time down the line where you want it to me. If you intend not to touch any funds from it, and you just are planning on having it transferred to your, to the beneficiaries, but while you’re utilizing it, we definitely don’t wanna meet Cash out surrenders.

This does perform like a Roth RA in that sense where you’d be able to withdraw your contributions tax or penalty free at any time. You technically, there may be a time to do that also, and we can talk on specific strategies on that, but once you B take it out, then you’ve stopped the compounding on that.

And that may not be wise, especially early on. As far as the other, any other time would be, if you were to just totally pull the policy out or surrender the policy in that sense where any gains above what you contributed could be, would be taxed at that point. But other than that, the death benefit at the upon death, the death benefit transfers tax free to your beneficiary.

It still falls under the state tax limits though. So be aware of that and there may be strategies to help with that. So we’re gonna get into some questions, that common questions that people will normally give us. The first one here is if I become ill what’s just AATE death benefit writer, caller.

Yeah. The good news. So the good thing is with a certain size policy, there’s an accelerated death benefit writer. That’s free of charge that gets tagged onto the policy. That in the event you develop a chronic illness or a terminal illness, you have early access to the death benefit. You always have access to the cash value regardless, but this, often the death benefit is much higher than the cash value.

And in the event, a chronic and that would be basically, you can’t do two of the six daily acts of living terminal illness would be that, two different physicians determine that you have less than 12 months to live. Both I think, bad situations, but the benefit of utilizing this asset again, we’re not doing it for that, but it does have this benefit where you’ll be able to draw higher amounts from it to help cover those expenses while you’re living versus just the death benefit.

And I’ll just mention it too, it’s a PSA. Like we had a guy, he had a, I, a heart attack or some kind of operation on his heart. And apparently he qualified for this. He’s fine today. Probably just can’t do, enter the CrossFit games or do Woff method and go swimming or anything like that.

But, he got a big payout. So if anything happens like that to you guys, talk to your insurance provider, cuz it might trigger getting.

Yeah, we tell the chronic terminal other writers, there are other writers that could get added to the policy. Again, we are utilizing this purely for the cash value component of it. If you wanted, these other writers oftentimes is better off having a separate policy specifically to address those needs. But if someone really wants to, we could add these on guaranteed insurability rider that’s an added cost that you have on your policy that, even in the event that you your current health rating changes that you’re able to purchase additional death benefit or insurance long-term care writer similar to that accelerated benefits writer, it’ll it just allows you to access some of the funds in the event for care.

Again, that one specifically, I think it’s better off to have it a separate policy or a separate life long term care insurance specifically to address that versus trying to tie it on. And then the waiver of premium writer again, also another Expense that in the event that you can’t make your premiums, it they can cover it for a certain amount, but for our design, because we’re minimizing that the PWA or the premium payments that really doesn’t benefit much, because it doesn’t really add much to the cash value since our premiums are so small to begin with there’s possibly, you could have a PUA premium rider, but that would be very expensive as well.

And usually once you one, if you’re able to make one or two years of full payment, max funding, that the growth of the policy, even if you are to just stop payments from there on out, and, we have the policy growth cover the premiums. That’s usually a better strategy than paying for the premium rider.

Yeah. To me, these are like, add-ons on a car, you buy the car to get from point a to point B, just like how you do this IBC to make money in two places and have a store of cash. So all these other things are just addons and other additional fees. I don’t know, depends talk to Tyler if it makes sense for you, but this is this is I think this opens the eye for a lot of people.

This is like a working example of people actually using this dang. And how it augments what you’re doing on the investment side. So maybe walk us through this Tyler. Sure. This was, if people heard me talk about, Hey, if you wanna get a hundred thousand of passive income a year, you literally would be investing a hundred thousand a year for years, 1, 2, 3, and four in syndications, and then year five, theoretically year one deals would be cashing out doubling if things went well.

So the a hundred thousand in year one turned into 200,000 in year two. And then it would you live off a hundred thousand, reinvest the other a hundred thousand and keep the machine going this strategy, this double dip just rolls insurance into that. The I B C into that year, it would require a little bit more upfront capital because of that loss of liquidity in year one.

But in this case, it would be a hundred thousand dollars target amount funding for 10 years. Your actual me limit would be 150,000. So that’s where you can actually year one stuff up to your me limit, but in this case, so this is that blue box. You max fund, you would fund 125,000 year one. You would have a hundred thousand available, in a form of a loan.

So you take that policy loan. Fund your two policy or two deals. $50,000 deals, year two, you have you fund a hundred thousand and your cash value at that point would be about 198,000. You could take out 90 or total. So it would go up about 98,000. So you could take out nine, 8,000, you’d have to supplement 2000 more.

And these are just rough numbers, but that would fund your next two deals. Year three, you fund your policy a hundred thousand. You would have access to that a hundred thousand and to fund your deals and year four, same thing you’d fund the a hundred thousand to your policy have access to a hundred thousand fund.

Your two deals in year five, when your deals pay out, instead of now having living off of a hundred thousand, you could take that a hundred thousand pay or your policy premiums or max fund it to a hundred thousand for that year, and then take that other a hundred thousand and fund your two deals and keep that machine going.

And then from there on, out from your five on technically, your deals are funding your premiums and you still have access to the cash value. On those later deals, you could then do the reduced, paid up at year eight, or because this was designed for a 10 year funding. You could continue funding at.

Most people at that stage when they’re seeing dumping in a hundred thousand and having more than a hundred thousand show up in cash value would wanna continue funded for as long as the design was for. And another concept that I look at this IPC is when you first do this, you gotta decide how much you’re gonna fund it every year for a five to 10 year range.

Basically what you’re doing is that’s your container side. And because we configure with 90 10, it’s pretty easy to hit your minimum contributions. You fund most of your first year, you’re done. You don’t really need to put anymore. So if you lose your job or something like that after you don’t really need to make your next year’s commitments.

And I think that’s a big game changer and it took me like four or five years to understand that myself. But the idea is creating this container to grow. You may not have the cash value inside, or cuz you’re taking the money out and growing it somewhere else as you should, because you’re gonna make a higher yield.

You should make a higher yield outside of this policy, but at some point, and this is the concept of end game or growing your net worth past two, 5 million, you wanna return the money back to this container and you’re gonna wish you had your container as large as could be. This could mean for a lot of you guys.

You. Maybe a million and a half, $2 million of potential cash value funding that you could hide money in there, asset protected and, tax free dividends there. That’s the concept of, this is more, this is a different diagram, which you guys can take a screenshot.

What, all this will be in the eCourse where you guys digest, this is, maybe partially, this you’re starting, you’re funding it like in toddlers standard plan. And then, you start to keep some cashier for unexpected life happenings college. There are a lot of different use cases where we’ll get to the end of the presentation here, but this is there’s a lot of different uses for the same thing.

And, like I said, this is how I use it in the growth mode, when you’re taking the money out, you’re investing in deals or whatnot. But yeah, just a lot of different use cases.

This is maybe a little another advanced strategy of the triple dip. The first thing you dump it into the cash value or the, you dump it into your policy. You leverage out, you can dump it into a brokerage account and then take a security back line of credit and then do the syndication.

So it’s just putting it in another asset that can be leveraged. Again, these are maybe more advanced and someone who you know, is comfortable with debt and strategic debt and maximizing that. But this is where, that same dollar could technically be working in three areas at the same time the limitations or policies. So again, be because it, it is insurance, there’s a maximum insurable amount. Your human life value is what the, what insurance companies are looking at. That’s generically tied to your annual income. And as you get older, because your earning years or less, that means you, you can qualify for less.

You could qualify for less and less. The rule of thumb is based on your annual income. There’s some flexibility with that and we can talk specifics on a private call. One major threshold is a $10 million death benefit or a cumulative death benefit. That’s where usually a third party verification would be required to validate your, the income look at possible tax returns.

And it becomes a lot more challenging once the death benefit crosses 10 mil health, your health obviously 📍 is a big factor on what health rating you get. Again, keep in mind that you’re being rated amongst the average American your age. So it’s it, some existing health conditions are expected.

The biggest thing is that it’s being monitored or are treated and there’s follow ups in that. One thing we normally recommend, if you, if there are, you would go to your primary care or someone to see what your records will look like, because the underwriting process does pull the records from your primary care provider.

And just see if there’s any notes in there or ask the doctor, if there’s anything in there that may impact your insurability. And if there is say, like there’s a recommended colonoscopy, but then you didn’t do it that it now would be the time to do it. So that there’s that follow up documentation in your record.

And now if you become uninsurable for whatever reason, then that’s where you could look at, a spouse who may be insurable some business partner, as long as you have an insurable interest, or why would you, why the need to be pulling a life insurance policy on someone else? That there’s possibilities of that.

So even though if you’re very old, maybe a working child, that they have a you have an insurable interest on, on, on their life that you maybe be able to fund a policy on a working child versus yourself. Yeah. So the 10 million cumulative death pay, or that, that cap at 10 million, most people won’t hit that in their first policy.

I think most people will get up to that in their second policy where they layer on top of that. But, $10 million, that’s like putting in quarter million dollars every single year for six or seven years, I would say most people will start off with maybe, a hundred, hundred $50,000 and that kind of segues into alright, we talked a lot about this stuff today.

What’s gimme a starter. What do people normally do? I did this video way back when my hair was a little longer, or if it didn’t stay down so here’s the use case. So like a million dollar net worth person, they’re able to save 60 to $80,000 a year. That’s the net, right?

Which you save. Most people in our group make, maybe make two or $300,000 a year and they spend most of it, but they have 60 to $80,000 left over. That’s like the net is what I’m calling. So what I normally will say is now take a third of that net. So a third of the 60 to 80 and use that as your base commitment every year for five to seven years.

So what that works its way out to is for most people here, at the very least do 30 to 50 grand a year. But then if you have a lot of like lazy equity, home equity, IRA money, then you may wanna layer up more on top of there. So in a, in addition to your 30 grand a year, Say another, another case somebody has 500 grand of lazy equity, which is very common.

Most of our investors, they come to me in their forties and they have half a million dollars, million dollars in their IRAs or, various places, at least half a million dollars in their home equity and they wanna get it working. And I think this is the use case of you’re supposed to put it in deals, you’re new, so you don’t really know where to put it. Or so the infinite banking is a great way where it is relatively zero risk in terms of like where these life insurance companies are gonna go. It’s a great place to just throw your cash from now, make a little bit of yield before you get your bearing, build your network, figure out where to put your money, who to trust for these deals.

So for this example, if you have half a million dollars of home equity or some other source of liquidity, what I would probably be doing is in addition to your 30,000 a year and in a hundred, cuz you funded in five years or, double up, put, a little bit more the first several years.

So I mean you could fund it anywhere from $130,000 a year to $250,000 per year again, because the way it’s configured with only 10% insurance, once you’ve funded, the 10% of it you’re done, which is typically in the first year or partial of the first year, If, and this is the game changer.

When people are configuring this with 30% or 50%, you may have to put in, another two, three years of payments so that the policy doesn’t cave in. So this is all the goal of this is to get your money into invest, but also increase the container size as much as possible. The 90 10 policies to me is the best tool for that job to overfund it and expand that container size as quick as possible, getting you the maximum amount of the cash value.

So you can go and take it out as a policy loan and invest it in deals or whatever you want and make our money elsewhere and still make money in two places. We, there was some discussion over what do I do after? That’s where I would say, maybe in year two to four, you get another policy on and layer on top of it.

Cuz at this point you’ve taken some policy loans. You get the you get it, you’re more comfortable with fields. So you layer on a bigger policy, big kid policy. And this is what I did. I started with, $50,000 in my first policy. I did that for a few years and I layered another one.

And then I layered another one where I hit my $10 million. And as an entrepreneur, it’s hard for me to verify my records because I don’t pay taxes cuz I don’t make income. That’s make all passive income. You drive it down to zero. One of the downsides is you can’t qualify for more than a $10 million insurance policy.

Or as Tyler tells me, it’s hard, it’s going to be hard. But I would argue, why do you need bigger than a 10 million policy where you can suck away one, 2 million of liquidity. At some point it becomes impractical. And to me like the way I look at money, even in end game, you should still be growing your money in maybe less value, add aggressive deals, but maybe more stabilized assets triple nets, things like that.

But I would say like the lesson learned that most people say is don’t wait and overanalyze. Like I think we got into some of the details a little bit, but is keep it simple folks, like just create a policy, fund it with a hundred grand a year, take it out, take a policy loan and invest it.

It’s simple, very simple. The interest rates and the way these policies they’re always changing and they’re never getting better. So the best time to do it was yesterday. And at the end, like your money is more safe than deals and banks. And that’s why. Tyler. And I will, we’ll talk about, new people coming in, and, I believe in the deals and I invested in myself, sometimes there’s very green investors that have a lot of money that they need to get it working.

I always can say with a clear conscience, I’m like, yeah, Tyler, just sign ’em up for a policy. And just at least make, they can make 5%, on that chunk of money. Because they’re new, they haven’t done this syndication E course or met other people and started to diversify into a multitude of different alternative investments.

But here’s some of the, if you guys wanna start to queue up your questions, we can get going through them after this slide. But here are the use cases that I’ve personally come up with. So starting at the top, or top left, comboing, this, we’ve talked about this quite a bit, investing in investments, alternative investments I’m coming out with a new pro fund where it’s just gonna be a straight 12 to 13% paid monthly.

What better the combo with your 5% infinite banking? You can also combo it for like college savings. They’re at the top, right? This is the 5 29 plan killer. This is the ability to keep money for the short term. Maybe your kids are going off to college in five years or 10 years. Great place to put this money.

The bad thing about 5 29 plans. They’re like 401k plans, they’re investment vehicles for the clueless, and they’re bad because they you’re stuck with all these retail investment products with high fees. And they’re just investments for the masses where all you guys listening, you guys have been opened up to the world of alternative investments.

Sure. You have to grow your network and get comfortable with the people you work with. But as you can typically find better returns and a lot safer in more real assets than the stock market or those investment options. But, this is where, it’s a lot of people use this interchangeably with their college savings for their kids or their retirement.

Bottom left, the end game investor, the guys that are above two, $4 million net worth, they have, they’re totally fine living off of 10 to $20,000 a month. I probably put Tyler in here a little bit, maybe not all your money, but a good chunk of your money is just sitting here just churning at 5% and.

At this point, maybe like a 70, 30 split policy where you can continue to fund it longer term might be better. But that just an opportunity for you to have just, it’s simple, right? If you need some money, just take a loan from your cash value your life insurance company, it’s super easy and your money is there and secured more secure than banks.

And then the bottom, just general new investors, right? You come into the alternative investment space, you don’t know what to do. Some people call it, wow, I got all these options, right? Multifamily, self storage, hotels, right? All these private funds where you’re investing, when you know the people and you’ve come out to a retreat and you meet all these cool people.

And they’re all like, not paying off their houses using debt appropriately, but it’s, it takes a while to get into this world, right? Unless you wanna just start throwing a hundred thousand dollars in a couple dozen places, know this is a great place to put your money and let yourself season let that relationship seasons, let’s see that first round of deals go full cycle.

Before you start to invest larger and larger amounts, certainly get over 20 to 30% in your net worth into alternative investments. But the majority, I would feel comfortable telling people that putting into this stuff is probably more secure, much more than the stock market mutual funds, and probably more secure than just leaving it in your own bank.

Banks fail. But well capitalized in life insurance companies that put people through rigorous health underwriting is a lot more secure. And at some people, some people will do the Helo set first and they’ll feel uneasy about that monthly interest, same concept here, like instead of the HELOC, you’re using your IPC, but for the reasons that, the banks can’t pull your know asset protection.

And I think this’s also great for, a lot of the people on the call, you guys are the more sophisticated investors in your family, but maybe you have older parents or, younger kids that don’t really understand the whole syndication investing. You, if not, let us know, maybe we can give ’em access some e-courses to get a more educated, but, maybe that’s just all they want.

My parents, they’re never going to invest in deals. They’re just stuck in their ways, but maybe this is definitely better than what they’re doing. And I think it’s something that you can promote to them as and feel good that it is very secure. I, I don’t know if the term risk free, but it’s the closest thing to zero risks out there.

Any other use cases, Tyler? I think I missed, or no I think that 5 29 is a big thing for me per se. I don’t, I have a 12 and a nine year old. My don’t con instead of contributing to a 5 29, which I feel is trapped that I put it into a policy also with long term care because you’re growing cash value or you’re growing cash.

Instead of, having a long term care insurance policy, I intend to tap into my, the whole life policy in the event, for healthcare in the future a couple others. So doctors or just high net worth people in general, who are more concerned with legal liability, getting sued.

Like I’ve combo this with my irrevocable trust where irrevocable trust is not a revocable trust. It’s a lot more heavy duty. If you’re under four, 5 million, it’s probably not even worth it. People who are an end game or high liability, like doctors, you can make an irrevocable trust, get it off of it.

But the problem there is like getting your money in and out is difficult and cumbersome. So by leaving some of your money, your liquidity in this infinite banking policy, it’s life insurance, like we said, it is protected. It’s under the umbrella or in my visual representation. It’s like under the patio in a way that you have the simplicity of use and access, but it’s still protected and you can have maybe more or just a portion of your network in your irrevocable trust.

So that’s another way of, use case for this. And then, entrepreneurs out there, business owners, this, I think the biggest thing about businesses is, there’s always gonna be ups and downs. The people who survive the downs are the people who take over the competition that fails and dies off.

The people who are well capitalized are the kind of, businesses never failed. They just lose money or did they just run out of money to keep ’em. But this would be the place where you would put your liquidity for your payroll. In case of a rainy day now, for most of you and you folks listening who are just salary guys, I don’t really see a huge need for liquidity stores.

Most people, three, four months of, salaries more than enough. So this is more for the, on the business owners out there who may wanna keep a few hundred thousand dollars in there for their, their staff of a dozen people, payroll. And Jay brought up a good point, Keyman insurance for a succession team.

That, that is huge also. So a lot of corporations do utilize that it’s a way of having some incentives also for their key employees. A business will pull insurance on their key employees. Business continues to own it, but it serves as a potential retirement incentive or supplemental income for the employee.

Maybe at some point it become, they become vested and you could either transfer the ownership to them or just pay their retirement from the policy as a business. So that is a key thing. One more thing is just, is, generational wealth. I think we touched a little bit about that, but insurance and life insurance specifically plays a big part in that as far as potentially creating generational wealth and continuing that legacy for generations to come.

All right. So we’re gonna get into the questions as you guys are typing into the Q and a box, but if you have to go, you can sign up and get access to the ecourse@simplepassivecash.com slash banking. But if you’re already part of the club, this is the URL to get access to the e-course. So everything that we talked about today broken up into a lot more bite size pieces.

In the the eCourse format that you guys know and love from us and a lot other, cool little tips in there too. I would say, the next step is, just getting an illustration and just moving forward. But let’s let’s hit into these other questions. Let me maybe accept this overall one that stands out.

So I think mark, mark asked as a commission agent, why would you design a policy to minimize your commissions? Truly it’s the reason why I do it personally is because it’s a better product for the client. I’m really doing it for the client first. I am an investor first also, so commissions are nice, but that’s not my livelihood or why I’m personally doing it.

It really is to give back to lanes, community specifically, but other investors also and provide them the best product that I feel is out there. And, truly have the client benefit. I feel even as with the minimized commissions it’s still very good. I’m very willing to share what those commissions are on a call, but.

Minimizing the commissions it’s still pretty healthy the commissions which is somewhat appalling when you hear like a hundred percent, the standard whole life, those commissions are basically 10 times what I would be pulling on the same size policy. And I’ll also comment that if you look at all my business associates, like the one thing I don’t want at this point in my life is nonsense.

And that typically nonsense occurs from somebody who is not financially free and still working in scarcity mode. And, in the deal side, it’s nice to work with high net worth partners because when things go wrong, we just throw in a few hundred thousand bucks each, and get the problem solved and make it right for the clients.

But, business is tough and when you’re not an alignment for the clients and you’re more in alignment or, there’s a lot of people out there, real estate agents, insurance agents, lending brokers, all the people in this financial industry that are they need to pay their own bills, like financial planners. It’s just not people I wanna get into bed with personally. And I, and I mentioned that and they, I that’s just maybe. Life advice for people is when you can get to a point, why do we all do this to get financially favorable? Why well, to do what we want with whom we want when we want that, so that’s why work with people that are, have seen the investments work fi in, in a place in their life.

And it just makes things better for everyone, including myself. , and it’s not like we need to really make money with this life insurance thing either. It just helps augment everything else going on more, less fees, more money to invest. And then, the investments, we can take down better deals in the future.

But other questions here, what life insurance company do you use? We’re not, Tyler’s not captive, so he’s not forced to sell you like a certain company. He can go wherever. Currently I think I know this is where Tyler goes to all these like meetings and they hang out and they do their secret handshakes and they figure out which ones are like the best one based on the rates and the flexibility.

But I think they’re the cool kids are using guardian these days, but, that’ll change all the time. I’ve seen it change couple times these last five years. There’s a minimum amount of a suggested amount of life insurance.

I would say, look guys, like if you’re gonna do less than 10 grand a year it’s a waste of time for everybody guys. Most people are at minimum, I would say, are doing like what 50,000 a year? I don’t know. What’s your take on this one, Tyler? Yeah. The tech, the true answer is, you could do a, any size policy the, that enhanced accelerated benefits writer.

And this is specifically for guardian that gets tagged on for free. If you’re whole life death benefit is at least a hundred thousand. So in that 45 year example, with that 45 46 a year, he was buying 190,000. So in his case, he could go about half of that 25,000 a year, or maybe 27,000 a year would be the smallest policy that he gets that benefit from.

I’ve done, I’ve written policies for people, a th 10,000 a year. It’s. You can see it, but it’s not the, it’s a small policy where they’re not gonna be able to have access to percentage wise you’ll have access to the same amount of money. It’s just that it is relatively small in the sense of why we would be doing this.

Yeah. You guys are investing in private placements and syndication. I would think guys, and you all your networks are over a million dollars. So I would say, like use case, I would say average person, our group million and a half, they are able to save 50 to a hundred thousand dollars at least a year.

And they have a bunch of liquidity, maybe a hundred or a couple hundred thousand dollars a year for five to six years would be a good starting point. But sure, if if you’d like to get a health review twice, that’s what I did. I started with a $50,000 policy every year and then I wish I did more because then I figured out what it is.

And I think that’s where you talk to other investors. And until you get the hang of oh, we take a policy loan to go into a deal. You realize that 50 grand is hardly anything. And then, you start to understand, oh, I nine understand why every, why everybody’s doing a hundred, 200, $250,000 a.

Into this, they just put it in there and they drain it out.

Number three, I think. Yeah. So niece, wait, our question is we are older and don’t have any children. Can these policies be set up for any relatives like nieces or nephews and maintain all the same loan benefits? Yeah. So there’s three main components to the policy. There’s the owner, the insured and the beneficiary.

So in this case you could be the owner. We’ve had, I specifically having haven’t done nieces or nephews, but there could be a reason why we would do that. And there’s insurable interest. The key thing we need to establish is what is the insureds insurable interest to you? Or if you have insurable interest to the person you’re ensuring and nieces and nephews, if you don’t have children could be that something, some, some writeups we’ve had is that they intend the nieces and nephews will in take care of you as you age.

You guys have that agreement. So you have an interest if they were. Pass then you would use that proceeds to hire someone else or, have to care for that. Or the death benefit would be used to find someone else to care for you. So that’s a typical story we’ve presented multiple times, not specifically for nieces or nephews.

But I think that story plays will continue to, then again, we can talk specifics on a call and to get to know all the details. Question four here is infinite banking appropriate to start if I am over the age of 70.

Yeah. We touched about this on the earlier parts, but it depends typically at 70 you might have a working child or someone else that may make more sense starting on them. But again we could just run the different scenarios to see what makes sense. My oldest client is 68.

And it’s yeah, because normally older people have done it on their working children. Question five here, are there no deals? There are no deals in life insurance. And I would say, yes, this life insurance folks are commodities. You guys can go shop it around. It’s just a matter of how much your agent wants to take in commissions.

It’s all the same Dan thing from the same underlying insurance company. But the question is, can you address the downsides of the nine, 10 design or 90 10 design which again is, where you maximize the cash value you decrease the commissions. So once a policy is paid up, we’re not able to sync a big amount into it.

You wanna take that one? Tyler? Sure. Yeah, we I, we actually answered the first half of the question, I think on the, during the call, the the downsides mainly is, there’s some limitation on the funding duration for that target amount. At some point that’s one of the biggest downsides for a 10 90 or a 90 10 design.

But the other question, once you, once a policy is paid up, you won’t be able to send yes. So you once the policy is paid, it, we, you do an option to do a reduced paid up that makes the policy paid up. So you no longer can contribute any more funds to it out of pocket, the policy will continue to grow.

Cuz as you receive dividends, it goes to purchase additional, paid up insurance in that fashion. But the good side of that is that you no longer have to put anything in either and there the premiums are zeroed out. So they’re not taking out any premiums from your policy cash value.

Yeah. And I don’t comment more on that one. Like I think if you wanted to, do you wanted to fund your policy long, long term because you’re in that stage of life where you just don’t care anymore, you’re not taking coupons, or maybe you are, but you’re not like optimizing at this point in your life, right?

Imagine you got $20,000, $50,000, a monthly passive cash flow coming in every single month and maybe you don’t have kids. You just don’t really care, right? Your time is more valuable than money. You may just wanna put your money in somewhere and have it make a little bit money and be able to continue to grow it and fund it with more new, fresh cash instead of taking that cash and investing it, which I think most of the people on the call are going to do because they’re still in growth mode then maybe a 70, 30 policy where you can keep funding.

It might work. But again, I think that one is, maybe talk to Tyler on that one too. Alright, so more questions. Number one here, can you talk about the advantages of using I B C with your charitable giving

you or so, I don’t know about specifically charit beginning, but you could have the death benefit or a charity be a beneficiary of your policy. Or secondly, the, your death benefit could go to a trust and you could have that within your trust. Determine what to give. I don’t know if that’s the question or in regards to your annual charitable giving.

I know if yeah, I don’t know exactly where that question is going, but. I know you can assign, if you didn’t have any kids you could probably assign an I B C to whoever you want. Yeah. Maybe if whoever’s question that was maybe type it into the Q and a box and we can come back to it.

But question two in this example, and I think they’re referring to that illustration page, what is the max we could take a loan from, is it from the net cash value? Yeah, that’s correct. The net cash value column. And we conservatively say 95% of that is what would be available in a policy loan.

So in, in year one, 41,735, so 95% of that. Yeah. The way you guys should be doing this, or most people, if you put the money in, you have 41,000 in net cash value, but you take a $41,000 loan the next day and you go into some deals, right? That’s the way you do this. And then of course, the next year, when you have to make your next premium and paid up additions and you fund it and you get that, but.

At some point, the money rolls in and then you refund it up and then you use this as that liquidity source to slush money in and out of. And then now maybe you’re seeing the big picture on the usage of this whole thing. There, there is. So there is a slight delay because the, you can’t do it the very next day.

You, it would be 10, it would basically be 10 business days. If you’re using that same funds that you just deposited, cuz the insurance company will need it to clear. So they look typically wait 10 business days, then they’ll process your loan. You can go in and request it right away, but it normally won’t get processed till that 10th business day cuz they, they wanna see that the funds cleared.

There’s one way of getting it slightly sooner than that. And if we can provide a bank statement showing the funds, cleared your bank they’ll accept that and then release the funds. But typically that doesn’t come into play unless you’re taking it out right after. So yeah. Good point.

Good point. I definitely, I think that’s where you guys talk with either Bri or Chad or team at simple passive cash flow.com. If you guys. You guys are cutting the wire a little too close there, just, let us know. And we typically can accommodate people. We do this ourselves, so we know it’s the, it’s not like the day of, but it can take a week or so question four, what do you think is a good target of how much percent of one’s net worth should be atypical and best should put into IBC?

I don’t know if net worth is a good thing right off the bat, but I would say whatever excess liquidity you have should be is more of an indicator. And I would go back to my other RX slide on that. But as far as like net worth as a percentage, when you’re under half a million dollars net worth need every single dollar going to investments, not this stuff.

So I’m not I would say if your net worth is under half a million dollars, don’t waste your time on this stuff, go make more money or will save it, save more money and invest it. But I think once, for most investors million dollar net worth, we’ve got X is we’re not the greatest.

We’re not the most efficient with our liquidity. Meaning you got 10 grand here, you got 50 grand in this account, you got. Hundred $200,000 of liquidity or equity debt equity in your house. I think that’s most of us on the call here who are credit investors, I think at that point, it would make sense to start implementing this strategy.

But as your net worth rose, it’s hard to say, right? And I think this is where you mix it up with other accredited investors. You have these types of conversations to me. If we were on a consult, I would ask you what are, what is your long term goals? Do you wanna continue to ratchet up to five, 10 million, 20 million net worth and con continue to grow, or once you get to formula and you wanna just shut off the engines and live life as the 4% rule with 20 grand of passive income coming in every single month, it’s it really matters up to you.

But I, yeah, I don’t know how to answer that question. I know you wanna put in your 2 cents that yeah. I think you covered, the net worth is slightly different. The net worth can play a part as far as being able to qualify for more insurance based just on your annual income.

But I, I don’t it’s hard to say. What do typically the net worths of these guys and, the financial profiles, like what’s I think that’s what the question is asking, right? Like of all the sophisticated investors doing this, what do you see them doing? Think it’s more like people want a bucket size, a certain bucket size. And so say someone wants, a $2 million bucket at some point, but that could be funded differently, that could be a hundred thousand or 200,000 over 10 years. It could be 250,000 over eight years. Or it could be, 50,000 or 50,000 over what was that? 40 years. So it’s really the size bucket and that’s I’m talking like your cash value size at some point in life. That’s usually what people are trying to target of saying, oh yeah. Good point. I think for like most business owners having half a million or a million dollars to be able to get at an end game is cool.

Any more than that, it’s just a little excessive, right? You could have your money elsewhere. This is not a growth option. You should have your money elsewhere making at least five to 10% elsewhere. To have more than a million dollars is a little silly. So yeah, good point there, Tyler.

This I would look at it, not as a percentage of your net worth, but like what kind of liquidity slush bucket that you want to have? I would say at most investors, it’s at least a couple hundred thousand at least is what you want at some point question five what’s wrong or not so good about, they mentioned Northwest mutual, what are like, we’re talking about the flexibility and the rates, but like, why is it that the ones that, we’re rolling with now are the ones that we are well I think specifically Northwestern, we mentioned them as a, one of the strong mutual insurance companies from my understanding, those are all captive insurance agents where they have to be with Northwestern mutual exclusively.

I personally like being independent and being able to be a broker, shop around or see different companies versus stuck with one company. Yeah. Nor Northwest nation is definitely one of the, like the triple a rated ones which is what we’re looking for. But the word on the street is like, when you start to build these policies for liquidity, taking money. Their policies just aren’t set up for that. There’s certainly your cash values. Aren’t gonna be as high, which is the whole point of why we’re doing this, which most financial planners don’t under, really understand what a question here, would it be better to do two policies and keep one going rather than having it total paid after seven years?

So either way it doesn’t matter. I think, it’s like the whole ready fire aim kind of mentality, I think is the best approach here, especially because the stuff here, commodities, and it’s no risk essentially, these stuff is more secure than banks. So the ready fire aim mentality here might be good to just get one policy and you’ll right, size it on the second one a year or few years later. That’s again, that’s my personal, like I got one and then I got another one for myself and then I followed up with one for my spouse.

I hit that ideal bucket size where I will very soon. And then or comments on that. Yeah. So I. It depends, it, because there’s flexibility in how we can design it. So we’re not, even though we show the seven year funding duration you, if you, if the funding duration is an issue, we can design something for 15 years or so, or maybe even longer.

But from a financial efficiency standpoint, I think starting two policies. If it started, if it’s, if you start at the same time, then I think there’s no loss of efficiency. If you’re starting one, maybe a little bit further down the road then one there’s a risk of the insurability. Something may happen over the two years that makes you less insurable, but also even if it’s the same health rating, you’re, you may be two or three years older.

There is some cost to that. But again, that cost may be less than if you started off with a larger policy that you don’t always max fun. So it depends. And that’s where we can go back and forth with some designs to show you the what ifs or compare the different two scenarios.

Yeah. And then piggybacking on the last question question two here. End game. What amount of cash value would you think is too much, 5 million, 10 million. So the cash value is, again, that bucket, that source of slush fund that you I ideally want, I’d say for most people, it’s at least a quarter million to like a million or 2 million.

I think you gotta be careful that, sometimes the cash value bucket size is different than like the death payout, which we mentioned before, we mentioned 10 million, that’s the death payout. But as far as like rightsizing the bucket, which is the cash value portion, that’s up to you personally, just, just know that, your money could be making more money elsewhere, so you don’t wanna go overboard with it.

I don’t know, a million dollars is a nice, if you’re an end game, it’s nice to have the peace of mind that if something goes wrong, you’ve got a million dollars to just throw down. And bill somebody out bail yourself out at some point that might seem like a lot of money, but yeah, end game.

More security is what you’re looking for at that point. And I think the bucket size can be large, but you’re in control of how full it is. Most of, even though say my bucket is too mill at this stage, a lot of that cash value is out deployed. I can make a choice at some point to start filling that bucket back up by paying off the loans or continue having it deployed in investments.

But having a large bucket size is beneficial to me. How you utilize it. You can make the decision and it’s not one size fits all, or you can course correct. Or right now I have everything deployed at some point I may want it full and just live off that four or 5% dividends be happy and not have to have the funds deployed.

So I think, I don’t know for me personally, my goal would be five mill target. I’m not quite there as far as total bucket size.

I think when you’re getting to really end game. Now, you’re thinking about, you’re putting your life insurance in your irrevocable trust and that’s caught an eyelet, but for most people on the call, your guys net worth is not end 20 million plus. It doesn’t matter because you don’t hit those state and federal estate tax limits.

So doing that is really no benefit to you guys, but yeah, we always like to have a conversation over in person when you guys buy a nice bottle of wine, because your net worth is 20-50 million. Of course, if that’s the question you’re asking, but similar on those lines, maybe your net worth is not 20 million, but it’s five.

You may wanna be thinking about charitable giving and that’s this FI question here. So that kind of was a follow up to the last question. And they said your regular annual charitable giving instead of cash contribution, purchase a single pay life policy with no me concerns for a nonprofit on yourself as a major donor to the charity would have insurable interests on you with the charity as the owner and beneficiary, they can use the policy loans for whatever they would have used a cash donation for, and the death benefit to buy more single pay life, making it an infinite endowment. That actually sounds like a very interesting strategy. I personally haven’t looked or used it in that way, but this definitely sounds like Yeah, it sounds very possible to do this.

Yeah. There’s a lot of uses for this stuff. And I think we put a lot of these more advanced strategies in the client section. Because when you’re in the end game, you get a little bored and you’d look for these types of strategies. For now, I think we just wanted to keep it simple for folks, just get going with a policy, throw in 50 grand a year, a hundred grand, maybe a couple hundred thousand a year for now.

And then, get going down the road and make money in two places. The quicker you start doing this the quicker you can make money in places the quicker you can start to create the time space, the head space for you to ask these kinds of good questions and come up with these strategies. Also along the lines of the end game.

One last question came in here. If you still use this bucket for deals or whatever else you want while still compounding, why would you want to limit it? I think the big thing that I’ve personally found and what was a roadblock for myself is when you go over a $10 million death payout or policy.

Now the life insurance companies are gonna want to see a whole bunch of documentation proving that is how much you make per year. And that might be a little bit of a pain for you to do. And especially if you’re not making income at that point in life. So that, that, I think that is another reason why, if you guys are still working your day jobs, you gotta do this now because all these policies are based on your ability to make money.

That’s what life insurance is at the end of the day, you being able to make money, which is why, getting policies on your little kids is a waste of time, cuz they can’t really qualify for that much. Why? Because they don’t make money. They don’t have jobs. So you know, like a lot of it is based on how much you make at your business or how much you make at your day job, your salary.

So it’s one of those things where you set up a policy before you leave your day job or retire. But if you’re already at end game and you’re looking to just keep funding this thing to in turning, I think you’re gonna run up to the issue of them saying you’re not making any active, ordinary income where you don’t have an income source at that point, other than your passive investments, of course, but they’re gonna have a hard time qualifying.

For you, but I dunno, Tyler, any thoughts on that one? Yeah. I, what you’re seeing is I think right on, I think Mark’s specific comment is why stop using your bucket for deals when you, it still compounds, you can still have it out for deals and grow your wealth. And I personally feel that’s a, the backup plan is to fill back up the bucket, right?

And then you no longer have to chase any deals or expose yourself to risk. It may be de-leveraging risk at that point to just say, Hey, I just want that consistent 4%. I intend to have my money working, at some point maybe deals may be a lot harder to find or whatever it is. This can be a fallback plan to have that, four and a half percent.

Dividend returns and live off of that without having to, to deploy money at all for going forward. But there’s that, I think that’s what that, that alluded to the thing about children which we didn’t really touch about. There is a limitation on non, so you can pull on children or minors.

The limitation would be the death limit. The death benefit limit will be 50% of what the parents have as death benefit. So if you, as a parent, have 5 million, a death benefit, a child would only be able to qualify for two and a half million of that. And then the health rating is a general health rating, like what it would be for a group, like at work, when you get group term insurance, It’s just a generic health rating.

So that health rating is not as great. So oftentimes with all of that combined for a minor, you might be able to throw in, eight to 10,000 a year total that’s the maximum you could put in a year still. And because the health rating is not the best, it may not be the most efficient use of that 10,000 purely for financial reasons.

There’s other reasons you might wanna do it for a minor, for a child anyway, but if you’re looking purely financially that may not be the best use of that, that $10,000. Any other questions please type it into the box?

Oh, Luke, raise his hand or, yeah, type it into the box there guys, but I wanted to show you the E course. So you guys know how to navigate it, but we’ll put the replay of this up on here, the way we have this laid out is, the introduction and then we broke out all the little slides into individual sections here for you guys.

And then implementation. And then, once you become a client, get access to the more advanced content here. That’ll just keep things fun and interesting, but this is the e-course, but, they get access to this. You gotta go to simple, passive, casual.com/banking, put your information in there.

But for most people yeah. The only other thing too is that the, it definitely is customizable and it’s not a cookie cutter, one design fits are or meets people’s needs. So that’s where a lot of times it is some back and forth tweaking and that, so a lot of the information we’re provided today is general overall, guidance definitely feel free to reach out and we can talk about specifics cuz there are small tweaks and things to that. Maybe more beneficial for certain goals and than for others so definitely reach out.

Transitioning From Turnkey Rentals and Networking Tips | Coaching Call With Aaron

What’s up, simple passive cash flow! Now on today’s podcast is yet another coaching call with myself and our volunteer, Aaron. Now Aaron’s been investing with us in our group for a while and he started when I was still teaching people how to buy term key rentals and. All that type of pain in the butt stuff.

If you notice we shut down the incubator group, because although I like helping people who are non-accredited investors, it just became a little bit of a not a good use of my time. Because. In the turnkey world or even, buying single family homes through a broker on your own.

The characters always change. And I think most of the accredited investors, at least ones in our mastermind group will all say, Rental properties are just a waste of time and their high liability. You have the personal debt in your own name, and unless you are doing some kind of birth strategy, wiring money to some random person on the, on non institutional level and, one bad relationship from losing a whole bunch of money.

It’s just not worth it. And I’ve said it all the time. Once your net worth goes to be about half a million, million dollars owning rental properties. It just makes no sense. And this is my story. Back in 2015, I had 11 of these turnkey rentals and I had maybe an eviction or two every year, some kind of big catastrophe that happened every quarter.

And you start to realize that, when someone trashes your property and now you’re stuck with a five $15,000 repair bill, you’re what was the whole point of this nonsense, with the headache and liability. And, even when you are working with a property manager, which by the way, they’re not aligned with you, they get paid more money when you have a vacancy, which is completely opposite on the commercial side, where we have we are aligned with our third party property managers on the assets of more in terms of profit and loss, as opposed to, they’re taking in the income from certain percentage of the rent.

Now, if you guys wanna interact with more credit investors who are doing crazy things, like taking money out of their home equity, via Heloc or infinite banking. And despite what Dave Ramsey says to scam and maybe for going on buying a primary residence, especially if you’re a non-accredited investor.

As I always say, I don’t think you should be buying a house unless your net worth is two or three X, that, or that house. Even if you are using debt, come out to one of our events and get to know other people. And definitely gonna be different advice from what your parents taught you and what your broke coworkers are doing, who are probably gonna be working there for the rest of their lives.

Come out on October 1st, we’re gonna be in Napa. Check out those details at simplepassatcashflow.com/Napa and October 6th and seventh. Especially if you wanna get boots on the ground and actually visit these properties that you invest in come out to Huntsville, Alabama. I know that’s a little hard, which is why the price on that one is a lot lower and subsidized for that.

Because we know it. Time investment is more important. But you may have to take an extra plane to get there to Huntsville, Alabama. You can either fly into Nashville, Birmingham, or straight into Huntsville, depending on where you’re coming from, but that is gonna be October 6th and seventh.

We’re gonna be doing a little party for the unveiling of the Chase Creek apartments, our latest development, and you can get more information by going to simplepassivecashflow.com/events where you’re also learning about our annual retreat in January, 2023. There too. Again, make sure you guys are part of our club because if not, we won’t let you come.

We always put it out there in our free Facebook group. But if you’re a high net worth accredited investor, I think that’s the type of stuff that you guys like, and it’s apparently it’s worked for us in the past that we’re really the only investor group out there that, highly vets, the people coming in for not only net worth their professional status, but as people too. So again, sign up for the club, simplepassivecashflow.com/club, and then check out our events that are coming up October 6th and seventh, Huntsville and October 1st in Napa valley.

And with that if you enjoy the coaching call and if you guys like this or you wanna volunteer for a future one, please email the team at team@simplepassandcashflow.com. We can change your name around. We don’t have to use your video. But that’s a great way for some folks to get some extra one hour guidance with myself. And we’ll give you the recording too. I guess. But thanks for listening folks and enjoy the show.

Hey, simple passive cash flows listeners. Today. We got Aaron here. He’s going to be doing a hot seat with us. So I’ve got your personal financial sheet up. If you guys are listening on a podcast, probably want to jump on YouTube and check this out if you want some visuals here, but welcome Aaron on the line.

And for joining us, maybe give us a little bit of a background. Just people get a sense of where you’re coming from. Yes, sir. I’m happy to be here. I’m excited to sit down and talk to you a little bit. Background college graduates started lurking in a kind of corporate America, so I decided I wanted to have more time to control my schedule.

So I ended up starting a small business, which is house cleaning, which I enjoy thoroughly. And so ups and downs there, but it did manage to have some extra cash flow looking for a home. And so I started exploring the world of investing, which led me first to stocks traded those for a while and returns, but ultimately it was looking for cashflow.

Continue the path of finding my time being more in my control. So it wasn’t there and I started looking at turnkey rentals and started my journey that way. Where are we geographically, do you live and about how old are you? Kids are. Born in Ohio and Michigan spent some time there.

Kurt grew up in Minnesota, went to Stillwater high school, which I thoroughly enjoyed, moved out for college to Colorado, which is where I currently live and met my wife. We have one child who’s sick, a little boy who is a lot of fun. So that’s geographically we’re at 40 years old and things that have that worked.

So it’s about where I’m at as present. Cool. It is in the cleaning business. And a lot of people don’t know. That’s the old lawn Mowing business where you get people to work for you, but on steroids and nobody wants to do it. That’s why it’s pretty lucrative. It’s nice because I wanted a business that had repeat customers so I could build over time.

So it’s not always looking for the next customer once you finish the job. So it started the background and construction, and I ended up a lot. There were, you can have a really great year one year and then almost nothing. Next quarter, it’s just a constant process of trying to find the next clients.

So the nice thing about this industry and what I like a lot about it is that you have to work a lot less hard. You develop relationships over time. And through that, you’re able to have a very lucrative and consistent job. The downside of course, is finding people who want to do the work. So that’s a struggle, but the main value I’m able to add to the marketplace is to find the people who are willing to show up and keep showing up and doing.

Cool. So let’s dig into this a little bit. So you jumped into turnkey rentals a couple of years ago, or about how long ago? Two years ago, give or take, and let’s talk a little bit about how you came to that decision and was it about, was it the right choice and it was your experience there.

Sure I listened to a lot of podcasts and read a lot of books. Of course, a lot of it starts with a little purple book. We all know so well, which is rich dad, poor dad trying to find assets that throw off cash flow. So I was trying to find something real. He did a lot of research time for about a year calling around talking to different people from knowing nothing at all to trying to find someone to partner with and found a group out of Memphis.

What I thought was a great tune in is a great team. What really took me off as I talked to several competitors of theirs and they all had nothing but nice things to say about their business practices and how they take care of their clients. And they were hunters. So I decided to go there. They might like many turnkey rental places that had a wait list.

So I wasn’t able to buy it. As much as I wanted to right away. So it took me about two years to get a four properties about as fast as they would let me enjoy the idea of leverage and the first, for the first year and a half. And what were they well and then just started to notice that the returns a hundred just really were undercut by the turnover in clients.

The small things that happen in probably know the value of properties I was at. I was relatively really solidly B properties may even be minus what would you say? The price in the rents or on the course? Those are a little under a hundred thousand. So we hit the 1% rule pretty often. So if it was 60 or a $70,000 house, I got $800. For the door. So it was hit by the 1% rule. So I think the cheapest house I bought was 65. The most expensive I got back was 95.

And now you’re not looking for turnkeys today, but how late is 2019. Now the pricing and rent values are still about the same. I know, I actually think it’s much worse. I was in the process of making some money on the sale of my properties, which surprised me in some ways because people were willing to pay a whole lot more for the same rent. I think by math, the last two I sold looked like they net a hundred, $150 a month per a unit. And from my point of view given what I’ve been through, that’s just not something.

To cover the incidental cost. They may hit all the numbers as far as maintenance and missing renters. But, it just takes one even a broken window and all of a sudden you’ve missed half of your income for the year. So it’s been much harder almost to the point of, it’s hard for me to imagine how people are buying.

Turnkeys at the price points that are now being offered to the same people I bought a couple of years ago at ones I thought were safe. That was theoretically adding on paper between two 50 and two 70. Most of the doors I bought and I just never saw that and felt, I feel like it’s a really tough choice nowadays.

If I were doing it again, I feel like it was even more than it was not what it was advertised. It felt mostly a little like I got false advertising at the end that the numbers worked out that just really it’s such low amounts that it didn’t take much to wipe out all your income for possibly a couple of years and just wanted to spend, yeah.

Maybe getting in the nitty gritty hair D where you are on your underwriting, where you include like five, 10% for vacancy. If I have 10% for repairs and maintenance, I was, yeah. I could pull up the spreadsheets if you wanted. That’s probably too much for the unit, but yeah, I looked at ages 10% on probably the combined between vacancy maintenance.

Just wasn’t sufficient, honestly. I think what people don’t realize is like the vacancy will. Come up at five to 10%, right? Like how you said, but what people don’t realize is when you get a vacancy, you’re going to have to pay up to half the first month’s rent. So that’s like another.

Five to 10% right there. Yeah, for me it feels like if I were doing the math again, there is the 50% rule you hear a lot about with full pull, your own real estate, where you expect to get about half of the rent amount in terms of profit. I feel if you apply that as a model back, did he not say, okay, if I add my vacancy, my repairs, my mortgage, can I still make money?

If that’s true. Yeah, it’s a little bit the same, but I felt yeah, exactly. They don’t take into account things like you’re going to pay up to a month. Actually, many of them suppliers, now you pay a month of rent every time you do the transition over. And to me, it also is just the repair costs in turn was more than I thought it would be too.

There are according to the averages between, 800 to 1200. And I think the cheapest turn I had was 1600 and I had several around 2,500 and they weren’t. They weren’t trashed places. It wasn’t holes in the walls and people were just mad and spray painting things. It was just they left stuff in the yard.

They left the house and it just took extra time. They had to come back in and mow the grass once a week on my dime, that kind of stuff. And they did a great job in many ways. The shocking thing for me is that many things went well. It wasn’t one big blow up of man. You should have seen this place.

It took all the profit away. These are just very normal every day, Hey, the, we had, I, we saw evidence of cockroaches, so we’re going to spray everything down. So that’s another in between. So this isn’t while I live there. So I had to do pest control for a whole year.

That’s another, two, 300. And then you add that to another thing. And another thing later in this field I just, I had $14,000 go out between the four properties in a three-month period. And it was just like, I’m just, don’t feel like I’m going to make the kind of return I can get.

I did the math and figured out I could basically buy us savings bonds and get the same return. And, I will second that the thousand 2000 for change orders. But then this last one I had, it’s going to be like, I don’t know if it’s only 10, 20 or 30 grand or fixed this latest one up. So commiserate, like, all it takes is as you did, you have a three grand turn. Like my God, like that’s all your profit for a decade. Feels like one to $200 a door. If you’re going for, I’m going to make even a percentage, it looks okay. Cause they put in $15,000 or $20,000 in. And if I get $200 a door it’s $2,400 returned as a lump sum return.

Sounds great until you realize that. Gosh, and then you talk about insurance and you talk about legal covering, even just for businesses. I just set up a business in Tennessee. It has a, I think it was a one to 3% on total net assets tax. So do you want to run the risk of having a personal umbrella insurance or do you want to have a corporation run it through that?

And then again, And really come back to really buy into your profit margin. My thoughts are like turnkeys as I think everybody should start there, if you have no experience, especially. And then, but what would you say Aaron to like, that younger kid, just out of college with just maybe 30 or 40 grand to his name is w what should they start off with?

I know both of us are hated on turnkeys right now. What would you say in hindsight? I think in hindsight, I would say that double the expenses that people are telling you, or an average when they’re selling you a. And if you can still make money then go for it. Like I would say, start talking to people and get real honest about how much the cost is really there.

And then do it, run the numbers that direction and make sure that, in comparison to other spaces, even again, bonds, like looking at municipal bonds at three to 4%. Now, if you’re taking 8% return, you cut it in half due to expenses. You’re only there. It’s hard to say, go after it at these prices.

Even if someone doesn’t have a lot of options, I really look at them and say, that sucks, but I’d say, find a different vehicle unless you can find one. The return plus 4%, you’ve got to get higher than that with real expenses and real, talk to lane and say, okay, break it down for me.

What am I really looking at in terms of real expenses? Cause I, one to two grand turns is just normal. And if you’re only expecting to make 12, $1,800 on that and that property a year, I don’t know how it works. I don’t know how you make money. Yeah, one more time. You might get appreciation, which is nice and good.

And certainly it helped me, but that was a lot of emotion, a lot of money coming in, especially if you don’t have a lot of cash coming in from your other business. I did. So it wasn’t tragic. I, I, maybe we go through this, I’ve got a decent amount of extra cash I can throw at it.

I went to $14,000. Expenses came through at three months, it wasn’t coming out of my living expenses. It wasn’t coming up. My family’s experience of lights. It was just unfortunate. And if you only have 30 grand and you’re looking to invest it, I just really make sure that you have a lot of margin or find another vehicle.

All right. And you know what, one thing I just wanted to point out for the folks. You went with one of these like perennial, turnkey providers. I think you knew going in that they were overpriced, but I know you for just stability. Yeah, I think the burn method, if you can find someone to walk you through that, it’s got a lot of attraction to it.

If you can make that three to $400 or even $500 a month, if you have the money and you have someone you trust, I could see maybe that working. I just think the turnkey has presented me even with someone who’s good at this. Just make sure that they’re offering more than $150 a month as a prize, as you went with like the Maserati trying to provide services there.

They have this waiting list because they have turnkey providers lining up around the block. I don’t know if I would recommend doing that. Oh, so you’re a lot more experienced now. So you don’t get that white glove treatment. And this is another reason why I don’t like the Facebook group that we have. I really stay away from recommending anybody because things change.

Try to keep providers. They’re just low-end flippers. Most of them that once they get better, they go do more retail flips and they get out of the gate. So it’s this constant battle of trying to find a new bathroom. It’s good enough to be good at what they do, but not so good that they end up cutting my margin so much that I actually don’t make as much.

Exactly. So that’s the plug for the mastermind. So we kind of trade providers and do that, you gotta pay to play guys. Sorry, I can’t just give up free referrals. Cause you guys have been wasting my provider’s time. Just calling them and wasting time. So sorry about that. Okay. So let’s talk about your property on Wren avenue down here at the turnkey at yeah.

That’s I don’t know what that came from, honestly. Sorry. Oh, okay. Okay. I got it. And I went to delete it. It’s pretty profitable. That it might’ve been, I was trying to represent The P the money I put into the, I’m sorry, the sorry, the apartment building. We just did. We just completed it. Oh, okay. That sounds like that address really.

Yeah. That’s the multifamily we just completed and that’s the Gavi now. Yeah. Yeah. Okay. I was like, that was that look, that’s an apartment building. We did that. I was like, man, that looks really a,

so yeah that’s 60,000 is what I have there, okay. What kind of dig into these personal financial sheets here a little bit. So you’ve got about 40 grand in liquidity. Did you liquidate the turnkeys? I did. Okay. Okay. And then you’ve got your home in cash. So what I usually am looking for is where is your lazy equity?

So you’ve got a little bit here, right? You could probably do what you want, let me ask you a question. Do you want to live in this house ? The long term I do. My first step next will be to get a home equity line of credit to attack some of that. Okay. If you didn’t want to live here. I would say of course sell it right.

But just move and get the equity all out. Cause like he locks are good for, because you can, it’s a reversible thing. It’s not like you sold it or you paid at one person origination rejuvenation for a new loan. But the bad thing is you don’t get entirely at all the equity because right now you’ve got about a hundred grand equity with the HELOC. You might be able to get 50 grand. Sure because they like to have that lazy equity. So they’re secured. So you’ve got about maybe 50 grand to play with here with a HELOC that you figure.

So you’ve got about 90% of firepower ready to go. Your net worth at the end of the day is about one 60. I think it’s just 60 out of the other things. So that’s a little bit more than that. Okay. Okay. Oh, okay. Okay. That’s what that was. Okay. Yeah, that was the multi-family. I just didn’t know what to put it, so I ended up there.

Yep. Okay. So what were, what are your two options at this point? And then let’s talk about this.
Are you asking? You’re telling, asking, oh I’d like to continue to look at renting my money out and building into the multifamily and or others indications. I’m a bigger fan of having more passive and the passive side of equity. I’m not looking to start another business. Did I feel like a lot of the options are?

So that’s what I’m hoping to do is to find a space that I can continue to grow. Investing into other people’s projects. I figure I can put 120,000 in, I got another 60. I can do this year, depending on what I want to find, and then, easily 60 a year after that growing as my returns grow. So that’s a six year plan to get myself to a half a million dollars invested in returning capital, hopefully around a 10% mark and I’ll come to you.

So this is what I look at it. If there’s one indicator of financial independence is they take this number minus this number, which is this. If you’re making, if you’re able to save more than 50, 60 grand a year, and you’re liking the top, at least top 20% of the people I talked to, which is like the 0.01% of the world.

Whatever that is. So that’s a big thing. It’s just not an analytical waiting game, right? This is the frustrating part. When you’re trying to grind from 200 to 500 to a million, and it’s gonna, it’s gonna, even if you didn’t even invest it, you’re gonna, in five years, you’re going to get up to half a million, right?

Yeah, three 50, but yeah, so what people don’t realize is when I started with zero it took, I bought that first property and then bought another property and then 10 31, and then this, it took me like seven years to get double digit units in that, just, it just moved like turtle speed. What about the idea of trying to go and find a broker and property manager and kind of piece together some single family homes yourself?

How does that idea sound to you? I’m not against it. Actually I feel fairly burned from the last experience of the turnkey. I don’t think it was necessarily just the turnkey side of it. I feel like I’d like to. Find a space where I feel like I’m more aligned with the lead investments idea. I like the idea of multifamily or at least the idea that I’m not the direct customer.

I feel like when I’m with the property management, they’ve meant really neat ways of making sure that they get paid. And I ended up being the first to get paid from the Abara complex. Ultimately they’re there to key in, on making sure the apartment complex is as proper as possible. So their incentive.

Is aligned with mine. I feel like I’m a little bit at odds with the property management and synchronization. But the syndications in theory, they sell them. Awesome. You have an asset manager and there are those, who’s a partner that manages the property manager day to day or week to week. But they don’t all go well. That’s the correct, w it’s just like the turnkeys, he thought it was good. Then you touch the stove and you’re like it hasn’t, we haven’t touched this homeless conversation with you works. How do I, who do I trust? And is this just one more?

It seems like on paper, but not to get through it three years from now. I’m like, yeah, that didn’t work out nearly as well. I think we’re in terms of where your net worth is right now. I think if you are like 500, 600,000, yeah. No brainer syndications, all the. But the fact that you’re in this quarter million, 2 million land, you, you may have to put a little bit more sweat equity to get it done quicker. Why is the return so much higher in a single family? I think what you’re not seeing is because you want the priMadonna turnkey provider. And the returns are very slim with them. And then you didn’t negotiate well with your property manager.

It shouldn’t, they shouldn’t take a full month’s rent on the first one. Yeah. Those are just some, but yeah, a lot of them out there were advertising that. Like I think if things go well and I think you’re going to get better and as an investor, you could probably beat what’s indications to you.

Don’t want to, you definitely don’t want to do that term. But it’ll get you to half a million quicker, but you save pretty damn good. You’re not like some guy who’s only able to put 10, 20 grand into the bank. Every. I do feel like it was in a couple of years, I have, between the equity, my, and my home, and I can get to 120,000 this year.

And, maybe 60 or 70 next year allows me to at least put chips on the table. Whereas indication goes, yeah. If I can find some willing to deal with someone like me, honestly, that’s a big issue. Not clearly not a qualified investor, so it’s a whole lot more difficult to do. So that’s what I would say is, it sounds like we’re w we see it both ways.

I think I wouldn’t totally not look for your own deals if you need. And if something looks very good, then be patient and pounce on it, just like the syndications to. Sure. And also it’s a sort of a misnomer it’s not you get access to more deals 90 to 97% is the statistic I heard of deals are for non-accredited investors.

It’s just, you’re not seeing because you’re not part of those networks. In my opinion, sometimes the credit owning deals aren’t as strong because they have to pretty much throw a hail Mary up in the stands and hope that they can get investors in mark. ‘ cause once they market those deals out, then they can only take accredited investors.

That makes sense. So I guess for me it’s how do I, I would look more towards, joining the right networks, even if I have to some way I do so to make it work. But on the other hand, I’ve only got, 50 to 60 grand a year to deal with. So that makes. Difficult as well. So I get, I feel like I’m in between, right?

This is what makes the scratch finally make it, it makes it so much sweeter because it was so difficult to get there. So talk to me about like time your resource of time. Is it better made finding more deals or connecting with more people or is it putting it back into the business and make more top line dollar?

It’s more connecting with people I’ve. I had the employees I want, and I’m fairly unwilling to keep on growing that side of it. Just because it’s, the turnover is killing my business. So I made a decision a couple of years ago that I’m not really going to grow much beyond my current level. So that’s, and, coming out with 50 or 60 grand worth of cashflow that I can use for investing, I don’t the amount of effort or take to add.

Without dramatically reducing it. Does that make sense? I’d have to reduce the amount of free cashflow to have to grow the business. And I feel like I could do better trying to find either network or other investment opportunities to run alongside my business. Then I would put in time and effort and money back into my business.

I buy that for sure. It’s most guys that are like, for example, doctors it’s just to get paid hourly rate. Yeah, it sounds like you’re up against a little bear or very yet the push through. I’ve got a pretty, I make a decent amount per hour, but I, to increase that Maura would take a different level of business that. Okay, I hear that. Any other questions? Like the life insurance, if banking is probably not going to be for you because you’re going to meet every single dollar to throw at more investments where assets that precinct. That’s what I feel about it too. So that’s my impression of it. I didn’t do the research into it.

It seems like I’m trying to find a way and I say my job is that if I can find a way to even make two or three grand a month of passive income, it’s not an all or nothing thing. I can back off a day, a week and find more time than possibly be a better investor, as opposed to spending all my time working and then just trying to invest in the margins.

So I have the ability to work, whatever number of hours I want. But that will reduce my number, my hours when I’m making. So if I can offset that, I can do that. More easily. And I think a lot of doctors or lawyers or engineers can tends to be more of an all or nothing kind of situation. That’s why also is attractive to me to try to find a way to make that return.

Even on the quarter million to the half million side would really change. Yeah. And if it doesn’t make it perfect. So I tend towards the, what I’d like to see is, who do I talk to? How do I get either mentorship or find a group that fits this category? And I’m not sure that there’s one which is I’m done with single family.

I have some free cash flow. I have as much free cashflow, as many doctors do perfectly. And trying to find a way to make the. Yeah. Yeah. Yeah, you have enough Coles going into the furnace is the, as the thought. And so there’s really not. Maybe the other option you haven’t thought about is as you expand your network, maybe you partner with as somebody in the summer position and you guys go after 20 units with each other.

Yeah. I can see that. That’s never really happens until you build the relationships and you meet the right person. And so if you weren’t, I know you’ve done this. If you were to build relationships from zero again, how would you go about doing it? So one mistake in relationships tomorrow, how would you start again?

Yeah. One mistake that I see a lot of people making is they go up to the person speaking on top of the stage. That’s the absolutely wrong place to go and not to sound like a jerk or anything coming to me as probably the wrong place to go. What I found the most effective is finding people on your left.

And then you that aren’t to any, they’re just working through their own stuff and you see if he sticks around and those are the people you trust, right? Because you see where they came from and there’s actual a real value exchange, both ways. They help you, you help them. And you guys want to get up to half a million dollars together, and then there’s a million dollars together.

From a high level that’s like that you think, or the places you think that person would be, I’m not asking for you, I’m just talking, where would you go if you had that position again? I know, I don’t know if I would recommend the local rehab because there most people there are broke.

That’s why they’re going to a local. It seems like one or two people. And then. Yeah, you do there. You’re not in the same place. I am put that way either they’re broke or they’re well successful that they’re not really. Yeah. And you just have a bunch of sharks there too. That are just from the stuff, the house flippers, just trying to stuff people into their deal and give them 10% on.

Take on all the risks you already know. That’s just lane. You’re an equity investor, not a debt investor at this point. So that’s. That might just tire you out, going to those types of things. But maybe I would go like maybe not every month, go out every other month, just be consistent.

You start to the point there’s now you try and realize who are the sharks and not to waste your time with them. And then who are the newer people coming out? And those are the people you’re trying to find, but you gotta get them up for the sharks. Get. I also know you’ve got the, a friend finder thing I haven’t really explored.

Do you think there’s people like me in that network? I could find. Yeah, but I don’t, I might be shutting that thing down because I just don’t have with, and here’s another thing I don’t like to connect people on, let’s say want to be connected. I do the double opt-in.

Standard operating procedure, or if you want to talk to this person, I go to talk to them first. If they want to connect with you. That’s just not cool if I just connect the email, but this all takes time and I got 40, 50 people in the mastermind now. And quite honestly, I need to focus more on them than the feat, the free Facebook groups and all these other free things.

Sure. There so unfortunately, I would get value out of the mastermind or the people not like me, or are they more still looking at single family and not there? Yeah. I don’t like the setting thing, but I think, yeah, you should probably join that thing. 20 or 30% are still in your shoes picking up their first few rentals, but majority are vetting bigger deals as a past.

Okay, but I think your net worth will be a little bit below the median. The median net worth is like 800,000. Okay. So maybe, I don’t know. Maybe that’s a good group to be part of. I don’t know. I’d like to be in a place where, you know, clearly, the, again, maybe too large, but I clearly want to be a place where people are smarter, more experienced than I am.

Yes. I’d rather be not room struggling to, have the, had the pressure to be like, okay, get better, faster than in a room where I feel, not that pressure. They’re not, I wouldn’t say they’re more experience. They’re all newer, but they’re very humble. And that’s what I like.

So it’s a good group of people like high paid professionals. That’s like shooting fish in a barrel, and that’s obviously not free, but so let’s get back to the free stuff because the person listening to the podcast is a cheapo. So I don’t mind spending the money. I want to find the space.

And I realized that quality people, and I’m just for the plug for the cheapo out there, I would say, Hey, spend a couple thousand dollars or several thousand dollars to fight. Someone who actually knows the answer. Otherwise, I think you end up with what I did, which was a lot of free advice. I ended up putting me in the premier Truckee area because that’s where I got funneled, which is, I’m not blaming anyone in that way, but I’m more than happy at this stage of life to try to find a way to spend money, to find the actual answers, not just the marketed answers.

Does that make sense? Yeah, the bread crumbs as I call it. Are those people who paid full time to go work at work. People just like me, who got just enough money. And that’s what the marketing is. The marketing to me who wants to just, I’ve got money. I want to spend up. I don’t wanna spend a lot of time and I want an easy solution.

That was me. Now I have learned more and I need do better than that, but that was who they were. So the goal is to find other people that are along your journey, that. If you’re doing turnkeys, maybe like how I had a few people in Birmingham with that I could bounce ideas off of her, or if my property manager wasn’t performing, I’m asking, oh, are you still using that same guy?

So that we all kind of band together that, but just, that’s just one example. Another example is just holistic wealth building ideas, or maybe even want to partner up and do a deal together. For example that’s what you’re trying to create now. How do we do that? I don’t know.

We’re not giving people much advice. We’re not doing a good job. I guess that’s what I’m pushing you. Why I signed up for this and I can be nicer in a minute if you want me to say something else, what is beyond just getting out of bigger pockets. What’s beyond just reading a bunch of blogs, listening to podcasts.

There’s something between that and the $40,000 mastermind, like what is, what exists between those two? I’m willing to spend the money if I need to, but I need to find a better source of advice than what’s free on the internet, because that led me to a mediocre. And I’ve been listening to podcasts for over a decade now.

And I’ll tell you that the podcasts are the same old stuff. I don’t even listen to podcasts anymore. And so what I would say the next step that I went down. Is get around. You gotta pay to go to like higher end conferences. Okay. You have to pay over a thousand dollars to attend these things.

And part of that is just getting around people who are more serious than the $50 weekend seminar crowd. But then I think what you’ll find is some of those groups are, they’re just not in the right. They’re more go getters. They’re more, $5 net worth guys that want to do big deals. You don’t want to find guys like that.

What I found was like other doctors, lawyers, engineers that were 10 years older than I was. So I was like, oh, I better copy with these guys too. I didn’t find out until I started joining these groups for 20, 30 grand membership fee. But once you get into the group, It’s amazing how easier gets, but you’re just trying to find a few good people, build a relationship with them, stick around for a year or two, and then eventually, hopefully they find somebody other groups or you do it’s really is the long game.

I’ve got one 20,000 I’m considering, but again, it gets back to I’m making good money per month and I can spend it. And I’m looking to stop trying to be the hero in the, do it myself, DUI. Yeah. I don’t recommend ever paying over that amount. I’m thinking about joining this one mastermind, just to give you guys access to more providers and like lending opportunities.

That’s an invite only one. And it’s only 25 grand. For me, that’s like for what it’s is it’s nothing. But I don’t think you need to spend that much. My, my program’s like under five grand, that’s a sell it, but I think the cool thing is if you want to do it the traditional way, you got to go to conferences.

You might have to go to a few of them. So that’s a few thousand bucks and you have to go fly there. And then it’s really like shooting fish in like a huge pond. Like you gotta meet the right people. You got to kiss a lot of frogs. You got to go back. If you’re an introvert, you’re going to go back to your room, super tired.

And hopefully you picked enough business cards. You can come back and hopefully rekindle a long lasting relationship. But I, yeah, step one. I think Erin is go to your local REIA. Cool once a quarter or something like that, at least, who are the sharks and who are like the new people that you want to connect with.

And now you had that your lens, right? How do you navigate that? That’s a scenario. Okay. But any other things that kind of comes to your mind? Things you might want to try. Yeah. I, I do, although the world, again, looking at things like note investing and such, you still look are interesting.

I’m not sure if I should or shouldn’t. I feel exactly the same way now. I feel a little kind of shy. Like I want to find somebody to walk me through how this might work. Yeah. For a lot of the passive investors that listen to this podcast for higher net worth guys, if you’re not, I don’t know why he listened to us.

Really the only things you want to do as an operator are like non-performing notes maybe self storage apartments, once you get to the assisted living or mobile home parks, those are more hands-on right. It’s a spectrum. Most hands-on operators like non-performing notes. For example, you can do that in the comfort of your home, living in Hawaii or Los Angeles.

Or the other ones, you gotta be boots on the ground that said, if you want to do non-performing notes, you have to go to the bootcamp. You gotta pay to play the 20 grand or whatever it costs in my humble opinion. Okay. Yeah. Like I said, I feel like I would need a guide in that kind of world. It doesn’t seem like a bad place, the questions are pretty endless, but if you want it to do something like non-performing notes, The way you circumvent that 20 grand pay to play method and just stop beating around the bushes.

You go network with the right people. And maybe that one of those people you network with that you build a long-term relationship with. Maybe they’ll want to teach it to you. There’s some sure injuries, right? Yeah. So that’s the only other thing on the horizon I think, was looking at those kinds of ideas. But I like the idea, like you said, no, that’s not an equity play. I’d like an idea. If I can find a way that your equity plays while also doing cash flow, that seems like at this stage of my development, trying to get to half a million rather than a million, I have to.

Yeah. I talked to this other guy the other day, all he’s been doing is. That deals at 10 to 12%. And I’m like, where the heck did you get in your head? That this is the way that you’re going to build your wealth while you keep talking to these fixed flippers that try to swindle him and their deal.

Do the math 10, 12%. You’re never going to get anywhere. You got the equity, especially if you only get it nine months out of 12, like it just doesn’t. Most of your time, your money is off the table. A good amount of it. I think the problem is. People don’t realize people look at what rich people do.

If you are like a million and a half, $2 million net worth for above and this stage of the market cycle. Yeah. You might want to be a debt investor to hedge your investing. But that’s not what somebody, half a million dollars, should be doing. You don’t have any money. You got to go make some money and go into equity investments.

You need them all, and you need all the tax benefits that go along with it. So again, that’s where you have to get around people, right? You can’t just listen to free podcast advice where it comes in your head one direction. There’s no feedback loop. And this is what’s nice about this conversation, right?

You get that, ask these questions that you get. And that’s why I really stopped typing stuff into the Facebook group, because I don’t type very well. You have to speak in terms of absolute, but it’s not absolutely every person, every situation is.

Okay that, that has helped. Cause I was tempted by the honestly the 10 and 12% I’m thinking maybe that’s a safer, more consistent return. So that, yeah, but you gotta, I want to get from a quarter million to half a million to a million . It’s a long road, if you’re gonna go that way.

And when you’re over a million then you can consider it, sure. That makes sense. But each of our own, if all you go to his local RIAs, that’s all you get presented with so much a flipper is looking, Hey, I’ll give you 12%. Yeah. If that, the people that I use, they’re all very experienced and you can actually rent the property out and make some money.

If things go really bad. So they’re giving a lot less than 4%, you pay for what you get. It’s very you can talk to Sam, but you’re taking a lot more risks than you did three years ago for the same amount of, yeah. Yeah. So sometimes you’ll see it, the local REIA is Hey, I want to borrow money at 15%.

Is this guy ever done anything, the first time I’m not really sure. I’m probably overpaying. Yeah. Yeah. But it’s a good deal, man. Yeah. It’s hard to hear. Cause I, like many other places, are immune. The average house is like $350,000 right now. So it’s hard for Colorados to find that space even more reason why not to do it right?

Like California or Seattle. There are 600 houses there. They’re wanting people to come in at half a million dollars. That’s everything I tell you not to do as a syndication investor, right? Don’t put more than 5% of your net worth into any one.

Yeah, that goes back to my goal of, okay I can save you for the next six years. If I put, if I consistently say at this Mount, which I’ve done, I proved that I can do it. It’s not just on paper. I’ve done it for over a year now. And spread it among, first, 10 and 20 different syndications. I don’t know if there’s a better way of doing it currently that I see.

Yeah. I think there’s a little bit of work to explore it off. Get your own deal. Because you are more experienced now. So I would say keep that road open. And then as you expand your net worth network, things will open up. I think in the beginning, when you were just two years ago, networking with anybody wasn’t going to do very much, but malware where you’re at this stage, then the network was really mad.

And I think that’s a big mistake that a lot of new investors make, they go out there and then they network like crazy, but it’s yeah, you’re networking with a bunch of other people that haven’t done anything that’s useless. But now that you’re at this stage, then the network is really where, that’s really where you have to put your energy.

I think that’s good. That makes sense. But cool. Anything else you want to chat about. I think that’s about it. I just appreciate your time and gave me some feedback. It’s hard to find again, like you said something between, you’re willing to do it for free and I’m really grateful for it.

We tried to make it definitely a lot cheaper and that was the vision. So I didn’t think anybody should pay 15, 20 grand to get started. That’s ridiculous. But yeah, simplepassivecashflow.com/journey is the URL to apply for that. But I think it would be a pretty good fit. Thanks for doing this, Aaron. And stay tuned for the next episode, guys. We’ll talk to you guys later.